LINEA UM GB 13-10-2011 9:36 Pagina 1 FIA T …aftersales.fiat.com/eLumData/EN/00/110_LINEA/00_110...the car. fig. 2 F0R0003m fig. 3 F0R0004m fig. 4 F0R0005m To relocate it, proceed

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. O W N E R H A N D B O O K

F I A T L I N E AENGLISH

LINEA UM GB 13-10-2011 9:36 Pagina 1

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,

offering quality and professionalism for all service operations. Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks

and practical recommendations by our experts.With Fiat Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features

of your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because

they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed

by Fiat for your car.

SAFETY: BRAKING SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE

COMFORT: SUSPENSION AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS

PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,INJECTORS AND BATTERIES

LINEACCESSORI ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

WHY CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS


Dear Customer,

Thank you for choosing Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Linea.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your car and use it in the best possible way.

You should read it right through before taking to the road for the first time.

You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you get the most from the techno-logical features of your Fiat.

Read the warnings and indications, marked with the following symbols:

personal safety;

car safety;

environmental protection.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:

❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity

❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.

Enjoy reading and happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Linea versions. As a consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the engine and bodywork version of the car you have purchased.

001-031 LINEA 1ed GB:001-031 LINEA 2ed it 5-11-2010 12:21 Pagina 1

VERY IMPORTANT

�

K

REFUELLING

Petrol engines: refuel only with unleaded petrol with an octane rating (RON) of no less than 95 conforming tothe European specification EN 228.

Diesel engines: refuel only with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the war-ranty depending on the damage caused.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged, set the gearshift lever to neutral, fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged, set the gearshift lever to neutral, fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the warning lights Y and m togo off; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the on grass, dry leaves, pineneedles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The car is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in orderto help protect the environment.


ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), con-tact a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle electric sys-tem can support the required load.

CODE CARD (for versions/markets where provided)

Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. Make sure you have the electronic code written on the CODE card with youat all times.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety fea-tures, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS…

... important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your car over time.Pay special attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (car safety).

�


4

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

PLANCIA PORTASTRUMENTI ........................................ 5

SYMBOLS ............................................................................... 6

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM ................................................. 6

THE KEYS .............................................................................. 8

ALARM ................................................................................... 11

IGNITION DEVICE ............................................................. 13

INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................ 14

INSTRUMENTS .................................................................... 16

DIGITAL DISPLAY ............................................................... 18

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ............................................ 23

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ....... 32

TRIP COMPUTER ................................................................ 42

SEATS ...................................................................................... 44

HEAD RESTRAINTS ........................................................... 45

STEERING WHEEL .............................................................. 46

REAR VIEW MIRRORS ....................................................... 47

HEATING AND VENTILATION ..................................... 49

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL ..................................... 54

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL ............................. 59

EXTERNAL LIGHTS ............................................................ 66

WINDOW WASHING ...................................................... 68

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 70

ROOF LIGHTS ..................................................................... 72

CONTROLS .......................................................................... 75

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH .................................................. 77

INTERIOR FITTINGS .......................................................... 78

DOORS .................................................................................. 82

ELECTRIC WINDOWS ..................................................... 83

BOOT ..................................................................................... 86

BONNET ............................................................................... 89

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK .................................................... 90

HEADLIGHTS ....................................................................... 91

ABS SYSTEM ......................................................................... 92

ESP SYSTEM .......................................................................... 93

EOBD SYSTEM ..................................................................... 96

PARKING SENSORS ........................................................... 97

RADIO .................................................................................... 99

INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICES .................................................... 100

REFUELLING THE CAR ..................................................... 101

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT ........................... 102

DDAASSHHBBOOAARRDD AANNDD CCOONNTTRROOLLSS


DASHBOARD

The presence and position of controls, instruments and gauges may vary depending on the versions.

1. Adjustable side air nts – 2. Fixed side air vents – 3. Left steering column stalk: external lights – 4. Instrument panel 5. Right-hand lever: windscreen wiper controls, trip computer – 6. Controls on dashboard – 7. Adjustable central air vents 8. Fixed upper air vent – 9. Front air bag, passenger side – 10. Glove compartment – 11. Sound system (for versions/marketswhere provided) – 12. HVAC controls – 13. Ignition – 14. Front air bag, driver’s side – 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever 16. Controls display: fog light/rear fog lamp/headlamp alignment adjustment/digital display/multifunction display.

5

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

F0R0001m

fig. 1


6

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSYMBOLS

Special coloured labels have been attachednear or actually on some of the compo-nents of your vehicle. These labels bearsymbols that remind you of the precau-tions to be taken as regards that particu-lar component.

The plate summarising the symbols usedcan be found under the bonnet, fig. 1.

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM

This is an electronic engine locking systemwhich increases protection against at-tempted thefts of the car. It is automati-cally activated when the ignition key isremoved.

An electronic device is fitted in each igni-tion key grip. The device transmits a ra-dio-frequency signal when the engine isstarted through a special aerial built intothe ignition switch. The modulated signal,which changes each time the engine isstarted, is the “password”, by means ofwhich the control unit recognises the keyand enables to start the engine.

fig. 1 F0R0002m


7

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIn this case, turn the key to STOP andthen back to MAR; try with the otherkeys provided if the problem persists.Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still can-not start the engine.

IMPORTANT Each key has its own codewhich must be stored by the systemelectronic control unit. Contact the FiatDealership to have new keys (up toeight) stored with the code.

Warning light Y coming on when driving

❒ If the warning light Y turns on, thismeans that the system is running a self-diagnosis (for example due to a volt-age drop).

❒ If the warning light Y stays on, con-tact a Fiat Dealership.

The electronic componentsinside the key may be dam-aged if the key is subjected tostrong shocks.

OPERATION

Each time the vehicle is started turning theignition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE sys-tem control unit sends a recognition codeto the engine control unit to deactivatethe inhibitor.

The acknowledgement code is sent onlyif the Fiat CODE system control unit hasrecognised the code transmitted fromthe key.

Each time the ignition key is turned toSTOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivatesthe functions of the engine control unit.

If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the warning light Y turns on ac-companied by the related message on thedisplay (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).


8

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLfig. 3

The metal insert A is retractable in thegrip and it operates:

❒ the ignition switch;

❒ the door locks;

❒ the fuel tank cap lock (for versions/markets where provided).

To take out the metal insert, press thebutton B-fig. 4 or B-fig. 5.

THE KEYS

CODE CARD fig. 2(for versions/markets, where provided)

The car is delivered with two copies of theignition key and with the CODE card,which bears the following:

A the electronic code;

B the mechanical key code to be given tothe Fiat Dealership when ordering du-plicate keys.

You should have the electronic code A-fig. 2 with you at all times.

IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfectefficiency of the electronic devices con-tained inside the keys, they should neverbe exposed to direct sunlight.

All the keys and the CODEcard must be handed over tothe new owner when sellingthe car.

fig. 2 F0R0003m fig. 3 F0R0004m

fig. 4 F0R0005m

To relocate it, proceed as follows:

❒ keep the button B-fig. 4 or B-fig. 5press and move the metal insert A;

❒ release the button B and turn themetal insert A until hearing the clickwhich indicates correct locking.


9

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SButton Ë is used for unlocking the doorsand the boot.

Button Á is used for locking the doors andthe boot.

Button R (present in some versionsonly) is used for remote opening of thetailgate.

When unlocking the doors, the passengercompartment roof lights will come on fora preset time.

Button B should only be pres-sed when the key is away

from the body, in particular from theeyes and from objects that can bespoilt (e.g. clothes). Do not leave thekey unattended to avoid the buttonbeing accidentally pressed while it isbeing handled, e.g. by a child.

WARNING

LED indications on the driver’s door fig. 5

When locking the doors, the LED Aswitches on for about three seconds andthan starts flashing (deterrence function).

If one or more doors or the tailgate arenot closed correctly when the doors arelocked, the LED and direction indicatorsstart flashing quickly. The operation willnot be completed.

fig. 5 F0R0006m


10

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

REPLACING THE BATTERY OF THE KEY WITH REMOTECONTROL fig. 6

To replace the battery, proceed as follows:

❒ press button A and open the metal insert B;

❒ turn the screw C to : using a finescrewdriver;

❒ take out the battery case D and replacethe battery E, respecting its polarity;

❒ refit the battery case D inside the keyand lock it turning the screw C to Á .

Used batteries are harmful tothe environment. You can dis-pose of them either in thecorrect containers as speci-

fied by law or by taking them to a FiatDealership, which will deal with theirdisposal.

fig. 6 F0R0007m

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONALREMOTE CONTROLS

The system can recognise up to 8 keyswith incorporated remote control. Shoulda new key with remote control be nec-essary, contact a Fiat Dealership, takingwith you the CODE card, a personal iden-tity document and the car’s ownershipdocuments.


11

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SKEY WITHOUT REMOTECONTROL fig. 7 (for versions/markets, where provided)

The metal insert of the key A is fixed.

The key operates:

❒ the ignition switch;

❒ the door locks;

❒ the fuel tank cap lock (for versions/markets where provided).

fig. 7 F0R0008m

ALARM

The car alarm system is available atLineaccessori Fiat.


Type of key

Key without remote control

Key with remote control

Direction indicators flashing (only with key with remote control)

Deterrence LED

12

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YThe main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:

Door unlocking

Turn key counter-clockwise (driver’s side)

Turn key counter-clockwise (driver’s side)

Press briefly the button Ë

blinks twice

Off

Locking the doorsfrom the outside

Turn key clockwise (driver’s side)

Turn key clockwise (driver’s side)

Brief press onbutton Á

flashes once

Lit for about three seconds followed by deterrence LED flashing

Unlocking the tailgate lock

–

–

Briefly press button R

blinks twice

Deterrence LEDflashing

IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing operation is a consequenceof a door locking control.

Closing windows(for versions/markets

where provided)

–

–

Hold down button Ë(for more than two seconds)

blinks twice

Off

Opening windows(for versions/markets

where provided)

–

–

Hold down button Á(for more than two seconds)

flashes once

Deterrence LEDflashing


13

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIGNITION DEVICE

The key can be rotated to three differentpositions fig. 8:

❒ STOP: engine off, key can be removed,steering locked. Some electrical devices(e.g. sound system, central door lock-ing system, etc.) can operate.

❒ MAR: driving position. All electric devices can operate.

❒ AVV: engine starting (temporary position).

The ignition device is fitted with an elec-tronic safety system that, in the event thatthe engine fails to start, makes sure thatthe ignition key is turned back to STOPbefore repeating the starting operation.

STEERING LOCK

Engagement

When the key is in position STOP, re-move it and turn the steering wheel untilit locks.

Disengagement

Move the steering wheel slightly as youturn the ignition key to MAR.

If the ignition device hasbeen tampered with (e.g. an

attempted theft), have it checkedover by a Fiat Dealership before dri-ving again.

WARNING

Always remove the key whenyou leave your car to pre-

vent someone from accidentally op-erating the controls. Remember toengage the handbrake. If the car isparked on a slope uphill, engage thefirst gear; if the car is facing downhill,engage the reverse ear. Never leavechildren unattended in the car.

WARNING

fig. 8 F0R0009m

Never remove the key whilethe car is moving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock as soon as it isturned. This holds true for vehicles be-ing towed as well.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out any after-market

operation involving steering system orsteering column modifications (e.g. in-stallation of anti-theft device) thatcould badly affect performance andsafety, invalidate the warranty andalso result in the car not complyingwith regulations.

WARNING


14

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YINSTRUMENT PANEL

Versions with digital display

A Speedometer

B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight

C Engine coolant temperature gaugewith excess temperature warning light

D Rev counter

E Digital display

Versions with multifunction display

A Speedometer



D Rev counter

E Multifunction display

F0R0010mfig. 9

F0R0011mfig. 10


15

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

Versions with reconfigurablemultifunction display

A Speedometer



D Rev counter

E Reconfigurable multifunction display

F0R0164mfig. 11


16

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YINSTRUMENTS

The instrument background colour andtype may vary according to the versions.

SPEEDOMETER fig. 12

This shows the speed of the vehicle.

REV. COUNTER fig. 13

The rev counter shows the engine rpm.

IMPORTANT The electronic injectioncontrol system gradually shuts off the flowof fuel when the engine is “over-revving”resulting in a gradual loss of engine power.

When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden increaseof the speed.

This behaviour is standard as it takes placeduring the activation of the climate con-trol system or the fan. It should not beconsidered as a fault. In these cases, a slowchange in revs is used to protect the bat-tery charge.

fig. 12 F0R0012m fig. 13 F0R0013m


17

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 14

The needle shows the amount of fuel leftin the fuel tank.

E empty tank (see “At the filling station”).

F full tank.

The reserve warning light A turns on toindicate that approximately 7 litres of fuelare left in the tank.

Do not travel with the fuel tank almostempty: any gaps in fuel delivery could dam-age the catalytic converter.

IMPORTANT The needle sets to E withthe warning light A flashing to indicate thatthe system is failing. If this is the case, goto a Fiat Dealership to have the systemchecked.

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 15

This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and starts working when thefluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

Under normal conditions, the needle as-sumes different positions within the scaledepending on the usage conditions.

C Low engine coolant temperature.

H High engine coolant temperature.

Warning light B may switch on (and a mes-sage on the multifunction display may beshown in certain versions) to indicate thatthe coolant temperature is too high; in thiscase, stop the engine and contact a FiatDealership.

fig. 14 F0R0014m fig. 15 F0R0015m If the needle for the enginecoolant temperature reachesthe red area, stop the engineimmediately and contact

a Fiat Dealership.


18

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YDIGITAL DISPLAY

STANDARD SCREEN fig. 16

The standard screen shows the followinginformation:

A Headlight alignment position (onlywith dipped beam headlights on).

B Time (always displayed, even with keyextracted and front doors closed).

C Odometer (distance covered in kilo-metres or miles) and TRIP data.

Note With key removed (when openingat least one of the front doors) the displayturns on and shows the time and coveredkm or miles, for a few seconds.

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 17

+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the displayed value.

MENUESC

Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or toconfirm the required menu op-tion.Hold down to go back to thestandard screen.

− To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the displayed value.

Note Buttons + and − activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:

Controlling the car interior lights

– on the standard screen, they control in-strument panel brightness, the radio andthe automatic climate control system.

Setup menu

– within the menu, they allow you to scrollup and down through the options;– during setting operations they increaseor decrease the values.

fig. 16 F0R0163m fig. 17 F0R0017m


19

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSETUP MENU fig. 18The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and − to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings(setup) given in the following paragraphs.

The setup menu can be activated by brieflypressing the MENU ESC button.

Single presses on the + and − buttons willscroll the setup menu options.

Management modes differ according tothe characteristic of the option selected.

Selecting a menu option

– briefly press the MENU ESC button toselect the menu option to set;

– press the + and − buttons (with singlepresses) to select the new setting;

– press briefly the MENU ESC button tostore the new setting and go back to theprevious menu option.

Selecting “Set Clock”

– briefly press the MENU ESC button toselect the first value to change (hours);

– press the + and − buttons (with singlepresses) to select the new setting;

– briefly press the MENU ESC button tostore the new setting and go to the nextsetup menu option (minutes);

– after setting the values with the same pro-cedure, go back to the previous menu item.

Prolonged pressing of MENU ESC button– to quit the setup menu if you are in themenu;– to quit to the menu if you are settingan option;– to save only the settings already stored(and confirmed by pressing the MENUESC) button.

The setup menu page is timed. Only thechanges stored by the user by briefly press-ing the MENU ESC button are savedwhen the menu is automatically closed.


20

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YOn the standard screen, briefly press MENU ESC tostart browsing. Press + or − to browse within the menu.Note For safety reasons, only the short menu may beaccessed while the car is moving (“SPEEd” setting).The standard menu is only available when the car isstationary.

fig. 18

F0R2003g

+

−

+− +

−

+−

+

−


21

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSetting a speed limit (SPEEd)

With this function, it is possible to set thecar speed limit (km/h or mph). When thislimit is exceeded, the driver is immediatelyalerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

To set the desired speed limit, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the mes-sage (SPEEd) and the previously set unit(km/h) or (mph) will appear on the display;

– press + or − to activate (On) or deac-tivate (OFF) the speed limit;

– if the function is on, press + or − to se-lect the required speed limit and thenpress MENU ESC to confirm;

Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mph according to the previously cho-sen unit (see “Setting the distance unit”)described below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each time+/− is pressed. Hold the button +/−down to increase/decrease the settingrapidly and automatically. When you getclose to the desired value, finish the set-ting with single presses.

– briefly press MENU ESC to return tothe menu screen or hold the button downto return to the standard screen withoutsaving.

To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:

– briefly press MENU ESC: (On) willflash on the display;

– press the button −: (Off) flashes on thedisplay;


Setting the clock (Hour)

This function is used to set the clock.

To adjust proceed as follows:– briefly press MENU ESC – the “hours”will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting;– briefly press MENU ESC − the “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting;


Adjusting the buzzer volume(BUZZ)

This function is used to adjust the volumeof the buzzer that sounds in the eventof failure/warning indications and whenthe MENU ESC, + and − buttons arepressed.

To set the desired volume, proceed as fol-lows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the displaywill show the wording (bUZZ);

– press + or − to select the required vol-ume (adjustable over 8 levels).



22

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YPassenger front and side (chest and pelvis) air bagactivation/deactivation (side bag) (BAG P)(for versions/markets where provided)

This function is used to activate/deactivatethe front passenger’s air bag.

Proceed as follows:

❒ press MENU ESC and, after the mes-sage (BAG P OFF) (to deactivate) orthe message (BAG P On) (to activate)is displayed by pressing buttons + or −,press MENU ESC again;

❒ the confirmation request message willbe displayed;

❒ press + or − to select YES (confirmingactivation/deactivation) or no (to abort);

❒ briefly press MENU ESC to confirmsetting and go back to the menu screenor hold the button down to go back tothe standard screen without saving.

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

−+

−+

−+

−+

F0R10

01g

F0R10

03g

F0R10

02g

F0R10

05g

F0R10

06g

F0R10

02g

F0R10

03g

Setting the distance unit (Unit)

With this function it is possible to set theunit.

To adjust proceed as follows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the displaywill show the wording (Unit) and the pre-viously set unit (km) or (mi);

– press + or − to select the required dis-tance unit.



23

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 21


MENUESC

Press briefly to access themenu and/or go to next screenor to confirm the requiredmenu option.Hold down to go back to thestandard screen.

− To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the value displayed.

MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY(for versions/markets where provided)

The car can be equipped with the multi-function display that, depending on previ-ous settings, shows useful informationwhen driving.

“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 20The standard screen shows the followinginformation:A Date.B Odometer (distance covered in km

or miles).C Time (always displayed, even with key

removed from the ignition and frontdoors closed).

D External temperature.E Headlight alignment position (only

with dipped beam headlights on).Note When opening one of the frontdoors, the display turns on and shows thetime and the kilometres or miles coveredfor a few seconds.

fig. 20 F0R0018m


Controlling the car interior lights

– on the standard screen, they control in-strument panel brightness, the radio andthe automatic climate control system.

Setup menu

– within the menu, they allow you to scrollup and down through the options;– during settings operations, they increaseor decrease values.

fig. 21 F0R0019m


24

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSETUP MENU fig. 22The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and − to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings(setup) given in the following paragraphs.A submenu is provided for some items(Setting the clock and Set units).The setup menu can be activated by brieflypressing MENU ESC.Single presses on buttons + or − will scrollthe setup menu options.Operating modes are different accordingto the characteristics of the option se-lected.

Selecting an option from the main menuwithout a submenu:– Briefly press MENU ESC to select themain menu option to set;– press buttons + or − (with a single press)to select the new setting;– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and go back to themain menu option previously selected.

Selecting “Set Date” and “Set time”:– briefly press MENU ESC to select thefirst value to change (e.g. hours/minutesor year/month/day);– press buttons + or − (with a single press)to select the new setting;– Briefly press MENU ESC to store thenew setting and go to the next setup menuoption: if this is the last one you will go backto the previous menu option.

Hold down MENU ESC:– to quit the set up menu if you are in themain menu;– to return to the main menu if you are atanother point of the menu (e.g. at sub-menu option setting level, at submenulevel or at main menu option setting level);– to save only the settings already stored(and confirmed by pressing the MENUESC) button.The setup menu environment is timed.Only the changes saved by the user bybriefly pressing MENU ESCwill be storedwhen the menu is automatically closed.

Selecting an option from the main menu witha submenu:– briefly press MENU ESC to display thefirst submenu option;– press + or − (with single presses) toscroll all the submenu options;– briefly press MENU ESC to select thedisplayed submenu option and open therelevant setup menu;– press + or − (with single presses) to se-lect the new setting for this submenu op-tion;– briefly press MENU ESCto store thenew setting and go back to the previoussubmenu option.


25

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

Day

Year Month

Türk Nederlands

Español

Português

Français

Italiano

Deutsch Polski

English

Example:

fig. 21

Example:On the standard screen, briefly press MENU ESC tostart browsing. Press + or − to browse within the menu.Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-sons of safety while the vehicle is moving (“Speed Beep”setting). The standard menu is only available when thecar is stationary.

F0R2004g

MENU ESC brief pressing of the button

+

–

EXIT MENU

SPEED BEEPRAIN SENSOR(for versions/markets,where provided)

SET TIME

SET DATE

SEE RADIO

AUTOCLOSE

MEASUREMENTUNIT

LANGUAGEWARNING VOLUME

BUTTON VOLUME

BELT BUZZER (*)

SERVICE

PASSENGER AIR BAG

(*) This function may only be displayed after the SBR system is deactivated by a Fiat Dealership.

TRIP B DATA

MENU ESC brief pressing of the button

HEADLIGHT SENSOR(for versions/markets, where provided)

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–+

–+

–

+–

+–

+–

+–

+–


26

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YTo cancel the setting, proceed as follows:




Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment(Rain sensor) (for versions/markets, where provided)

This function allows you to adjust the rainsensor sensitivity to 4 levels.

To set the required sensitivity level, pro-ceed as follows:

– briefly press the button MENU ESC,the previously set sensitivity “level” willflash on the display;

– press the button + or − for setting;


Speed limit (Speed Beep)

This function is used to set the car speedlimit (km/h or mph); the driver is imme-diately alerted when this limit is exceeded(see chapter “Warning lights and mes-sages”).To set the desired speed limit, proceed asfollows:– briefly press MENU ESC – the displaywill show the wording (Speed Beep); – press button + or − to select speed limitactivation (On) or deactivation (Off);– if the function has been activated (On),press buttons + or − to select the re-quired speed limit and then press MENUESC to confirm.Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mphaccording to the previously chosen unit (see“Setting the distance unit” paragraph ) de-scribed below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each time thebutton +/− is pressed. Hold the button +/−pressed to increase/decrease the settingrapidly and automatically. Complete the set-ting by briefly pressing the button when youapproach the required value.– briefly press the button MENU ESC toreturn to the menu screen or hold thebutton down to return to the standardscreen without saving.

Headlight sensor (Automatic headlight sensitivityadjustment) (for versions/markets where provided)

This function is used to adjust the dusksensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1= minimum, level 2 = medium, level 3 =maximum); the higher the sensitivity, thelower the amount of external light neededto switch the headlights on.

Proceed as follows to set:

– briefly press the button MENU ESC,the previously set level will flash on thedisplay;

– press the button + or − to select;



27

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

STrip B On/Off (Trip B data)

This function can be used to activate (On)or deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (par-tial trip).

For further information see “Trip com-puter”.

Proceed as follows to switch the functionon and off:

– briefly press MENU ESC – On or Offwill flash on the display (depending on pre-vious setting);



Setting the clock (Set time)This function enables the clock to be set through two submenus: “Time” and“Format”.To carry out the adjustment, proceed asfollows:– briefly press MENU ESC – the displaywill show the two sub-menus “Time” and“Mode”;– press the button + or − to switch be-tween the two submenus;– select the required option and thenpress MENU ESC briefly;– if selecting “Time”, briefly press MENUESC – the “hours” will flash on the dis-play;– press the button + or − for setting;– briefly press MENU ESC – the “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting;– if selecting “Mode”, briefly press ME ESC– the mode will flash on the display;– press the button + or − to select “24h”or “12h”. When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESCto go back to the menu screen or hold thebutton down to go back to the standardscreen without storing. – hold MENU ESC down to go back tothe standard screen or main menu, de-pending on where you are in the menu.

Set date (Set Date)Using this function you can update thedate (day – month – year).Proceed as follows to update:– briefly press MENU ESC – “day” (dd)will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting;– briefly press MENU ESC – “month”(mm) will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting;– briefly press MENU ESC – “year”(yyyy) will flash on the display;

– press the button + or − for setting.


28

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YAutomatic central door lockingwith car running (Autoclose)

When activated (On), this function locksthe doors automatically when the vehiclespeed exceeds 20 km/h.

This function is available on all versionsand may only be switched off by meansof the multifunction display or reconfig-urable multifunction display.

Proceed as follows to activate (On) or de-activate (Off) this function:

– briefly press MENU ESC to display asubmenu;

– briefly press MENU ESC – On or Offwill flash on the display (depending on theprevious setting);


– briefly press the button MENU ESCto go back to the menu screen or holdthe button down to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing;– hold MENU ESC down to go back tothe standard screen or main menu, de-pending on where you are in the menu.

Note The setting increases or decreasesby one unit each time + or − is pressed.Hold down the button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automat-ically. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required value.– briefly press MENU ESC to return tothe menu screen or hold the button downto return to the standard screen withoutsaving.

Audio information (See sound system)With this function the display shows in-formation about the sound system.– Radio: selected radio station frequencyor RDS message, automatic tuning acti-vation or AutoSTore;– Audio CD, MP3 CDs: track number;– CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;To show the sound system information onthe display (On) or clear it (Off), proceedas follows:– briefly press MENU ESC – On or Offwill flash on the display (depending on theprevious setting);



Setting measurement units(Units of measurement)

With this function it is possible to set theunits through three submenus: “Distances”,“Consumption” and “Temperature”.

To set the required unit proceed as follows:

– briefly press MENU ESC to display thethree submenus;

– press the button + or − to switch be-tween the three submenus;

– after selecting the submenu to be modi-fied, press the button MENU ESC briefly;

– when entering the “Distance” submenu:briefly press the button MENU ESC andthe display will show “km” or “mi” (de-pending on the previous setting);


– when entering the “Consumption’” submenu:briefly press the button MENU ESC andthe display will show “km/l”, or “mpg” (de-pending on the previous setting);


29

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SLanguage selection (Language)

Display messages can be shown in the fol-lowing languages: Italian, Turkish, Dutch,Portuguese, Polish, French, Spanish,English and German.

To set the desired language, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the previ-ously set language will flash on the display;



If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in km/h.

If the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.


– if selecting “Temperature” submenu:briefly press MENU ESC and the displaywill show “°C” or “°F” (depending on theprevious setting);

– press the button + or − to select;When you have made the required ad-justments, briefly press MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or hold thebutton down to go back to the main menuwithout saving.

– hold down MENU ESC to go back tothe standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the position in the menu.

Adjusting the failure/warningbuzzer volume (Warning Volume)

With this function the volume of thebuzzer which accompanies the display ofany failure/warning can be adjusted ac-cording to 8 levels.

To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the pre-viously set volume level will flash on thedisplay;




30

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YScheduled Servicing (Service)

Using this function you can display infor-mation about the mileage intervals for carservicing.

To consult this display, proceed as follows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – service in-tervals in km or mi, depending on the pre-vious setting, will be displayed (see“Measurement units” section);

– briefly press MENU ESC to go back tothe menu screen or hold the button downto go back to the standard screen.

Note The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” requires the car to be serviced every30,000 km (or 18,000 mi) or every 20,000km (for versions/markets, where pro-vided); this indication will appear auto-matically with the key at MAR when thereare 2,000 km left (or 1,240 mi) and will be displayed automatically every200 km (or 124 mi). Below 200 km ser-vicing indications are more frequent. Thedisplay will be in kilometres or miles de-pending on the measurement unit settings.When the next scheduled servicing is ap-proaching (“coupon”), the message “Ser-vice” will appear on the display followedby the number of kilometres or miles leftwhen the key is turned to MAR. Contacta Fiat Dealership to carry out any serviceoperation in the “Scheduled servicingplan” and to reset the display.

Adjust the button volume (Button Vol.)

This function may be used to adjust (over8 levels) the volume of the noise madewhen the MENU ESC, + and − buttonsare pressed.

To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:





31

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SPassenger front and sideprotecting chest/pelvis air bag activation/deactivation (side bag) (passenger’s bag - for versions/markets where provided)


Proceed as follows:

❒ press MENU ESC and, after display-ing “Bag pass: Off” (to deactivate) or“Bag pass: On” (to activate) by press-ing buttons + and −, press MENUESC again;

❒ the display will show the confirmationmessage;

❒ press + or − to select either Yes (toconfirm activation/deactivation) or No(to abort);

❒ briefly press MENU ESC to confirmsetting and go back to the menu screenor hold the button down to go back tothe standard screen without saving.

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

MENU ESC

−+

−+

−+

−+

−+

−+

F0R10

09g

F0R10

11g

F0R10

10g

F0R10

13g

F0R10

14g

F0R10

09g

F0R10

09g

MENU ESC

F0R10

15g

F0R10

16g

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cy-cle of settings listed in the menu screen.

Briefly press MENU ESC to go back tothe standard screen without saving.

Press button − to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).


32

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YMULTIFUNCTIONRECONFIGURABLEDISPLAY (for versions/markets where provided)

The car may be equipped with a recon-figurable multifunction display that, ac-cording to previous settings, will showuseful driving information.

STANDARD SCREEN fig. 23/aThe standard screen shows the followinginformation:A TimeB DateC Sport driving mode indication (for ver-

sions/markets where provided)D Odometer (distance travelled in kilo-

metres/miles)E Car conditions (e.g. doors open, ice on

road, etc.)F Headlight alignment position (with low

beams on only)G Outside temperatureWhen the ignition key is turned to MAR,the display’s main screen will show thedate fig. 23/a or the turbocharging pres-sure fig. 23/b, depending on the settingpreviously chosen from the “First page”menu item (“Date” or “Engine info”).

CONTROL BUTTONS – fig. 24


MENU Press briefly to access the menuESC and/or go to next screen or

to confirm the required menuoption.

Hold down to go back to thestandard screen.

− To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the displayed value.


– within the menu, they allow you to scrollup and down through the options;

– during setting operations they increase ordecrease the values.

Note When opening one of the frontdoors, the display will turn on and showfor a few seconds the time and the dis-tance covered.

fig. 24 F0R0019m

fig. 23/a F0R2010gb fig. 23/b F0R0241m

032-043 LINEA 1ed EN:032-043 LINEA 1ed it 4-11-2010 16:18 Pagina 32

33

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSETUP MENU fig. 25

The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and − to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings(setup) given in the following paragraphs.A submenu is provided for some items(Clock and Unit of measurement).

The setup menu can be activated by brieflypressing MENU ESC.

Single presses on buttons + or − will scrollthrough the setup menu options. Operat-ing modes are different according to thecharacteristics of the option selected.

Selection of an option from main menu without submenu:

– Briefly press MENU ESC to select themain menu option to set;

– press buttons + or − (by single presses)to select the new setting;

– briefly press button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe main menu option previously selected.

Selecting an option from the main menu withsubmenu:

– briefly press MENU ESC to display thefirst submenu option;

– press buttons + or − (by single presses)to scroll all the submenu options;

– briefly press MENU ESC to select thedisplayed submenu option and open therelevant setup menu;

– press buttons + or − (by single presses)to select the new setting for this submenuoption;

– briefly press MENU ESCto store thenew setting and go back to the previoussubmenu option.


34

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YExample:

Day

Year MonthTürk Nederlands

Español

Português

Français

Polski

Italiano

Deutsch

BELT BUZZER

RAIN SENSOR(for versions/markets, whereprovided)

TRIP B DATA

SET DATE

FIRST PAGE

SEE RADIO

AUTOCLOSEUNIT OF MEASUREMENT

LANGUAGE

WARNING VOLUME

BUTTON VOL.

MENU ESCbriefly press button

MENU ESCbriefly press button

fig. 25

SERVICE

F0R2005g

SET TIME

SPEED BEEP

EXIT MENU

PASSENGER BAG

English

On the standard screen, briefly press MENU ESC to start browsing.Press + or − to browse within the menu. Note Only the short menumay be accessed for reasons of safety while the car is moving: setting“Brightness” and “Speed Beep”. Stop the car to access the full menu.

HEADLIGHT SENSOR(for versions/markets, where provided)

(*) Turbo versions

−

+

+ ++

+

+

+

+

+

+++

+

+

+

+

+

−−−

−

−

−

−

−

−−

−−

−

−

−

−


35

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

STo cancel the setting, proceed as follows:




Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment(Rain sensor)(for versions/markets, where provided)This function allows you to adjust the rainsensor sensitivity to 4 levels.To set the required sensitivity level, pro-ceed as follows:– briefly press the button MENU ESC,the previously set sensitivity “level” willflash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting; – briefly press MENU ESC to return tothe menu screen or hold the button downto return to the standard screen withoutsaving.

Speed Beep (Speed limit)

This function is used to set the car speedlimit (km/h or mph); the driver is imme-diately alerted when this limit is ex-ceeded (see chapter “Warning lights andmessages”).

To set the desired speed limit, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the displaywill show the wording (Speed Beep);

– press button + or − to select speed limitactivation (On) or deactivation (Off);

– if the function has been activated (On),press buttons + or − to select the re-quired speed limit and then press MENUESC to confirm.

Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mphaccording to the previously chosen unit(see “Setting the distance unit” paragraph)described below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each time thebutton +/− is pressed. Hold the button+/− down to increase/decrease the set-ting rapidly and automatically. Completethe setting by briefly pressing the buttonwhen you approach the required value.

– briefly press the button MENU ESC toreturn to the menu screen or hold thebutton down to return to the standardscreen without saving.


36

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YHeadlight sensor (Automaticheadlight sensitivity adjustment) (for versions/markets where provided)This function is used to adjust the dusksensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1 = minimum, level 2 = medium, level 3 =maximum); the higher the sensitivity, thelower the amount of external light neededto switch the headlights on.Proceed as follows to set:– briefly press the button MENU ESC,the previously set level will flash on thedisplay;



Trip B data (Activating Trip B)

This function can be used to activate (On)or deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (par-tial trip).

For further information see “Trip com-puter”.

Proceed as follows to switch the functionon and off:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the displayflashes “On” or “Off” depending on pre-vious setting;



Time adjustment (Clock adjustment)

This function enables the clock to be setthrough two submenus: “Time” and “For-mat”.To carry out the adjustment, proceed asfollows:– briefly press MENU ESC – the displaywill show the two submenus “Time” and“Format”;– press the button + or − to switch be-tween the two submenus;– select the required option and thenpress MENU ESC briefly;– if selecting “Time”, briefly press MENUESC – the “hours” will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting;– briefly press MENU ESC – the “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press the button + or − for setting.


37

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SNote The setting will increase or de-crease by one unit each time + or − ispressed. Hold down the button to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly and au-tomatically. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required value.– if selecting “Format”, briefly pressMENU ESC: the mode will flash on thedisplay;– press the button + or − to select “24h”or “12h”.

When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the submenu screen or holdthe button down to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing.

– hold down the MENU ESC buttonagain to go back to the standard screen ormain menu, depending on the point of themenu you are at.

Set date (Setting the date)

Using this function you can update thedate (day – month – year).

Proceed as follows to update:

– briefly press button MENU ESC:“year” will flash on the display;


– briefly press button MENU ESC:“month” will flash on the display;


– briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”will flash on the display;

– press the button + or − for setting.

Note The setting increases or decreasesby one unit each time the button + or −is pressed. Hold down the button to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly and au-tomatically. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required value.


First page (display of informationon the main screen) (for versions/markets where provided)

This function allows you to choose the in-formation you would like to display on themain screen. You can choose to display thedate or the turbocharger boost pressure.To select either option, proceed as fol-lows:– briefly press MENU ESC – “First page”will appear on the display;– briefly press MENU ESC once again toshow the display options “Date” and “En-gine info”;– press + or − to select the informationyou wish to see on the main page of thedisplay;– briefly press the button MENU ESC tostore the selection and go back to the pre-vious menu screen, or hold the buttondown to go back to the standard screenwithout memorising.When the key is turned to MAR and theinitial check stage is over, the multifunc-tion display will show the information se-lected through the “First page” menufunction.


38

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSee radio(Repeat audio information)

With this function the display shows in-formation about the sound system.

– Radio: selected radio station frequencyor RDS message, automatic tuning acti-vation or AutoSTore;

– Audio CD, MP3 CDs: track number;

– CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;

To show the sound system information onthe display (On) or clear it (Off), proceedas follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);



Autoclose (Automatic door lock operationwith car running)

When activated (On), this function locksthe doors automatically when the vehiclespeed exceeds 20 km/h.

This function is available on all versionsand may only be switched off by meansof the multifunction display or reconfig-urable multifunction display.

Proceed as follows to activate or deacti-vate this function:

– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play a submenu;

– briefly press MENU ESC – the displayflashes “On” or “Off” depending on pre-vious setting;


– briefly press the button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or hold thebutton down to go back to the standardscreen without storing;

– hold MENU ESC down to go back to thestandard screen or main menu according tothe point of the menu where you are at.

Unit of measurement(Set unit of measurement)

With this function is possible to set theunit of measurement in three submenus:“Distance”, “Consumption” and “Tem-perature”.

To set the required unit proceed as fol-lows:

– briefly press MENU ESC to display thethree submenus;

– press the button + or − to switch be-tween the three submenus;

– after selecting the submenu to be mod-ified, press the button MENU ESCbriefly;

– if selecting “Distance”: briefly pressMENU ESC and the display will show“km” or “mi” depending on the previoussetting;


– if selecting “Consumption”: briefly pressMENU ESC and the display will show“km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg” depending onthe previous setting;


39

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIf the distance unit is set to km, you canset the fuel consumption unit to km/l orl/100 km.

If the distance unit is set to mi, fuel con-sumption is displayed in mpg.


– if selecting “Temperature”: briefly pressMENU ESC and the display will show“°C” or “°F” depending on the previoussetting;


When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the submenu screen or holdthe button down to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing.

– hold down the MENU ESC buttonagain to go back to the standard screen ormain menu, depending on the point of themenu you are at.

Language (Language selection)

Display messages can be shown in differ-ent languages: Italian, German, English,Spanish, French, Portuguese and Dutch.

To set the desired language, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press MENU ESC – the previ-ously set language will flash on the display;



Warnings volume(Adjusting the fault/warningacoustic signal volume)

With this function the volume of thebuzzer which accompanies the display ofany failure/warning can be adjusted ac-cording to 8 levels.






40

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YButton volume(Button volume adjustment)

This function may be used to adjust (over8 levels) the volume of the noise madewhen the MENU ESC, + and − buttonsare pressed.


– briefly press MENU ESC – the previ-ously set volume level will flash on the dis-play;



Belt buzzer (Buzzer activation for SBR indication)

This function can be displayed only after aFiat Dealership has deactivated the SBRsystem (see “SBR system” in the “Safety”section).

Service (Scheduled servicing)

Using this function you can display infor-mation about the mileage intervals for carservicing.

To consult this display, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MENU ESC: serviceinterval in km or mi, according to previoussetting, will be displayed (see paragraph“Distance units”);

– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or hold the but-ton down to go back to the standardscreen.

Note The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” requires the car to be serviced every30,000 km (or 18,000 mi) or every 20,000km (or 12,000 mi) (for versions/markets,where provided); this indication will be au-tomatically displayed with the key at MARwhen there are 2,000 km left (or corre-sponding value in miles) and will be dis-played automatically every 200 km (orcorresponding value in miles). Below 200km servicing indications are more fre-quent. The display will be in kilometres ormiles depending on the measurement unitsettings. When the next scheduled servic-ing is approaching (“coupon”), the message“Service” will appear on the display fol-lowed by the number of kilometres ormiles left when the key is turned to MAR.Go to a Fiat Dealership, where the “Sched-uled Servicing Plan” operations will be per-formed and the message will be reset.


41

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SPassenger front and side chest/pelvis protection air bag activation/deactivation (Side bag)(for versions/markets where provided)


Proceed as follows:

– press MENU ESC and then, after dis-playing the message “Bag pass: Off” (to de-activate) or “Bag pass: On” (to activate)by means of buttons + and − pressMENU ESC again;

– the confirmation request message ap-pears in the display;

– press buttons + or − to select (Yes)(confirming activation/deactivation) or(No) (to abort);

– briefly press MENU ESC to confirmsetting and to go back to the menu screenor hold the button down to go back tothe standard screen without memorisingsettings.

MENU ESC

F0R20

06g

F0R20

07g

+−

F0R20

08g

MENU ESC+−

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cy-cle of settings listed in the menu screen.

Briefly press MENU ESC to go back tothe standard screen without saving.

Press button − to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).


42

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YTRIP COMPUTER

General information

The “Trip computer” is used to display in-formation on car operation when the keyis turned to MAR. This function allowsyou to define two separate trips called“Trip A” and “Trip B” for monitoring thecar’s “complete journey” in a reciprocallyindependent manner.

Both functions are resettable (reset – startof a new journey).

“Trip A” is used to display the values re-lating to:

– Range

– Distance travelled

– Average consumption

– Current consumption

– Average speed

– Trip time (driving time).

“Trip B”, available on multifunction displayonly, is used to display the figures relat-ing to:

– Trip distance B

– Average consumption B

– Average speed B

– Trip time B (driving time).

Note “Trip B” function can be excluded(see paragraph “Activating Trip B”).“Range” and “Instantaneous fuel con-sumption” parameters cannot be reset.

Values displayed

Range

This indicates the approximate distancewhich can be travelled with the presentamount of fuel in the tank. The display willshow the reading “- - - -” when the follow-ing events take place:

– range value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi)

– car parked with engine running for a longperiod.

Distance travelled

This value shows the distance coveredfrom the start of the new journey.

Average consumption

This value shows the approximate aver-age fuel consumption from the start of thenew journey.

Instantaneous consumption

This indicates the fuel consumption. Thevalue is constantly updated. The message“- - - -” will be displayed if the car is parkedwith the engine running.


43

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SAverage speed

This value shows the car’s average speedbased on the overall time elapsed since thestart of the new journey.

Journey time

Time elapsed since the start of the newjourney.

IMPORTANT In the absence of informa-tion, Trip Computer values are displayedwith “- - - -”. When normal operating con-dition is restored, calculation of differentunits will restart regularly. No values dis-played before the failure will be reset norwill a new mission be started.

TRIP BUTTON fig. 26

The button TRIP is located on the top ofthe right-hand lever. With the ignition keyturned to MAR, by this button the pre-viously described parameters can be dis-played and reset to start a new mission:– short press to display the different values– long press to reset and start a newmission.

New mission

This begins after a reset:– “manual” resetting by the user, by press-ing the relevant button;– “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip dis-tance” reaches 3999.9 km or 9999.9 km(according to the type of display) or whenthe “Trip time” reaches 99.59 (99 hoursand 59 minutes);– disconnection/reconnection of the battery.

IMPORTANT The reset operation when“Trip A” details are being displayed resetsthe information associated with this func-tion only.

IMPORTANT The reset operation when“Trip B” details are being displayed resetsthe information associated with this func-tion only.

Start of journey procedure

With ignition key on MAR, press and holddown the button TRIP for over 2 sec-onds to reset.

Exit Trip

To quit the Trip function: keep MENUESC held down for over 2 seconds.

fig. 26 F0R0020m


44

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

The fabric covers on your ve-hicle have been designed to re-sist normal wear and tear. Youare however recommended

to avoid strong and/or continuousscratching with clothing accessoriessuch as metal buckles, studs, Velcrofastenings and the like, as these itemscause stress of the cover fabric thatcould lead threads to break and dam-age the upholstery.

SEATS

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUALADJUSTMENT fig. 27

fig. 27 F0R0021mAny adjustments should becarried out only when the

vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

Lengthwise adjustment fig. 27

Lift the lever A and push the seat forwardsor backwards: in driving position yourarms should rest on the rim of the steer-ing wheel.

Once you have released theadjustment lever, always

check that the seat is locked on theguides by trying to move it back andforth. If the seat is not locked intoplace, it may unexpectedly slide andcause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

WARNING

For maximum protection,keep the back of your seat

upright, lean back into it and makesure the seat belt fits closely acrossyour chest and pelvis.

WARNING

Height adjustment fig. 27(for versions/markets where provided)

Move lever B upwards or downwards toachieve the required height.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must only be car-ried out when seated in the relevant seat.

Backrest angle adjustment fig. 27

Turn knob C.

044-090 LINEA EUROPA 2ed GB:044-090 LINEA 2ed it 28-03-2012 16:21 Pagina 44

45

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

fig. 28 F0R0022m

Electric lumbar supportadjustment – fig. 28(for versions/markets where provided)

The position of the back against the seatbackrest is electrically adjusted by turningcontrols E.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

FRONT – fig. 29

On certain versions the head restraintsare adjustable in height and they lock au-tomatically in the required position.

To adjust head restraints, proceed asfollows:

❒ upwards adjustment: lift the head re-straint until it locks.

❒ downwards adjustment: press buttonA and lower the head restraint.

To extract the front head restraints: pressbuttons A and B at the same time and lift.

fig. 29 F0R0024m

To make the best use of the head re-straint’s protective action, adjust the back-rest so that your torso is upright and keepyour head as close as possible to the headrestraint.

Head restraints must be ad-justed so that the head,

rather than the neck, rests on them.Only in this case can they protectyour head correctly.

WARNING


46

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

REAR – fig. 30(for versions/markets where provided)

To move the head restraint upwards, raiseit until a click is heard (position of use).

To bring it back to the position of non-use, press button A and push the head re-straint down into the back rest.

To extract the rear head restraints, pressbuttons A and B at the same time and lift.

IMPORTANT When the rear seats are inuse, the head restraints must always bein the position of use.

fig. 30 F0R0025m

STEERING WHEEL

The driver can adjust the height and axialposition of the steering wheel.

To carry out the adjustment, proceed asfollows:

❒ release lever A-fig. 31 by pushing itforwards (position 2);

❒ adjust the steering wheel;

❒ lock lever A by pulling it towards thesteering wheel (position 1).

fig. 31 F0R0026m

Any adjustment of the steer-ing wheel position must be

carried out only with the car station-ary and the engine turned off.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out any after-market

operation involving steering system orsteering column modifications (e.g. in-stallation of anti-theft device) thatcould badly affect performance andsafety, invalidate the warranty andalso result in the car failing to com-ply with regulations.

WARNING


47

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SREAR VIEW MIRRORS

INTERIOR MIRROR – fig. 32

The mirror is fitted with a safety devicethat causes its release in the event of a vi-olent impact with the passenger.

It can be moved using the lever A to twodifferent positions: normal or antiglare.

fig. 32 F0R0027m fig. 33 F0R0028m

Some versions are equipped with an elec-trochromic mirror. The button ON/OFFon the lower part of the mirror is used toswitch the electrochromic function on andoff. When reverse is engaged, the mirroris always set for daytime use.

DOOR MIRRORS

Electrical adjustment fig. 33

This operation is possible only with thekey turned to MAR.

To carry out the adjustment, proceed asfollows:

❒ use switch B to select the required mir-ror (left or right);

❒ to adjust the mirror, move switch C inthe four directions;


48

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y When driving the mirrors mustalways be in position 1-fig. 34.

As the driver’s door mirror iscurved, it may slightly alter

the perception of distance.

WARNING

Defrosting/demisting (for versions/markets where provided)The mirrors are fitted with resistors thatare activated when the heated rear win-dow is turned on (by pressing button ().IMPORTANT This function is timed andit will turn off automatically after a fewminutes.

fig. 35 F0R0030m

Manual adjustment – fig. 35

Use knob A-fig. 35to adjust.

fig. 34 F0R0029m

Folding

When required (for example when the mir-ror causes difficulty in narrow spaces), itis possible to fold the mirrors by movingthem from position 1-fig. 34 to position 2.


49

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

fig. 36

F0R0031m

HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM

1. Upper fixed vent – 2. Adjustable central vents – 3. Fixed side vents – 4. Adjustable side vents – 5. Lower vents for front seats –6. Lower side vents for rear seats – 7. Lower central vent for rear seats (for versions/markets, where provided).


50

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

CONTROLS – fig. 39

Knob A regulates the airtemperature (mixing hot and cold air)

Red section = hot air

Blue section = cold air

Knob B activates/adjusts the fan

p 0 = fan off

1-2-3 = ventilation speed

4 - = max. fan speed

fig. 39 F0R0034m

fig. 37 F0R0032m

fig. 38 F0R0033m

ADJUSTABLE SIDE ANDCENTRAL VENTS – fig. 37-38

A Fixed vent for side window.

B Adjustable side vents.

C Adjustable central vents.

Vents A are fixed.

To use vents B and C, adjust them as re-quired using the relevant device.


51

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SKnob C adjusts air distribution

¶ to direct air to the centre and sidevents;

ß to send air to the feet and direct cool-er air to the dashboard vents, in in-termediate temperature conditions;

© for heating when the outside temper-ature is very low: to direct as much airas possible to the feet;

® to warm the feet and, at the same time,demist the windscreen;

- for quick windscreen demisting.

Air recirculation on/off slider D

Bring the slider to position v to re-circulate internal air.

Bring the slider to position ¶ to switchinternal air recirculation off.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTHEATING

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knob A to the red section;

❒ turn the knob C to the required position;

❒ turn the knob B to the required speed.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTVENTILATION

To ventilate the passenger compartmentwell, proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knob A to blue section;

❒ deactivate the internal air recirculation;

❒ turn the knob C to ¶;



52

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YFAST PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT HEATING

For the fast heating of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:


❒ activate internal air recirculation;

❒ turn the knob C to ©;

❒ turn the knob B to 4 - (max. fanspeed).

Then use the controls to maintain the re-quired comfort conditions and bring slid-er D to ¶ to turn air recirculation offand to prevent misting.

IMPORTANT With a cold engine, youhave to wait for a few minutes to let thesystem fluid reach optimum operatingtemperature.

FRONT WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (WINDSCREENAND SIDE WINDOWS)

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knob A to the redsection;


❒ turn the knob C to -;


After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfortconditions.

Window demisting

In the event of considerable external mois-ture and/or rain and/or large differences intemperature inside and outside the passen-ger compartment, perform the followingpreventive window demisting procedure:



❒ turn the knob C to - or to ® if thewindows do not demist;

❒ turn the knob B to 2nd speed.


53

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

fig. 40 F0R0035m

HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/DEFROSTING fig. 40(for versions/markets, where provided)

Press button A to activate; when this func-tion is on, the button LED lights up.

This function is timed and will turn off au-tomatically after 20 minutes. Press A againto switch it off in advance.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage.

INTERNAL AIRRECIRCULATION ACTIVATION

Move the slider D to position v toswitch internal air recirculation on.

It is advisable to switch the internal air re-circulation on whilst queuing or in tunnelsto prevent the introduction of polluted air.However, it is better not to use the func-tion for long periods, particularly if thereare many people on board, to prevent thewindows from misting inside.

IMPORTANT The internal air recircula-tion system makes it possible to reach therequired heating or cooling conditionsfaster depending on the mode selected.

Do not use the air recirculation functionon rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting.


54

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

Knob C adjusts air distribution

¶ to direct air to the centre and sidevents;

ß to send air to the feet and direct cool-er air to the dashboard vents, in in-termediate temperature conditions;

fig. 41 F0R0036m

© for heating when the outside temper-ature is very low: to direct as much airas possible to the feet;

® to warm the feet and, at the sametime, demist the windscreen;

- for quick windscreen demisting.

MANUAL CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM (for versions/markets where provided)

CONTROLS – fig. 41

Knob A regulates the airtemperature (mixing hot and cold air)

Red section = hot air

Blue section = cold air

Knob B activates/adjusts the fan

p 0 = fan off

1-2-3 = ventilation speed

4 - = max. fan speed


55

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SAir recirculation on/off slider D

Bring the slider to position v to recir-culate internal air.

Bring the slider to position ¶ to switchinternal air recirculation off.

Switching the climate controlsystem on and off

Press the knob E-fig. 41 (LED on knobwill light up) to switch the climate controlsystem on.

Press the knob E again (LED on knob willgo off) to switch the climate control sys-tem off.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTVENTILATION

To ventilate the passenger compartmentwell, proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knob A to the blue section;




CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling)

For fast cooling of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knob A to the blue section;



❒ press the knob E to turn the climatecontrol system on; the LED on theknob will come on;


Cooling adjustment

❒ turn the knob A to the right to increasethe temperature;


❒ turn the knob B to reduce the fanspeed.


56

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YPASSENGER COMPARTMENTHEATING

Proceed as follows:


❒ turn the knob C to the required symbol;

❒ turn the knob B to the required speed;

QUICK PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT HEATING

For the fast heating of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:



❒ turn the knob C to ©;


Then adjust the controls to obtain the re-quired conditions of comfort and switchinternal air recirculation off.

IMPORTANT With cold engine, you haveto wait for a few minutes to let the sys-tem fluid reach the operating temperature.

FRONT WINDOW FASTDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(WINDSCREEN AND SIDEWINDOWS)

Proceed as follows:


❒ turn the knob B to 4 - (max. fanspeed);

❒ turn the knob C to -;

❒ deactivate the internal air recirculation.

After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfortconditions.

IMPORTANT The climate control systemis very useful for speeding up demistingsince it dehumidifies the air. Adjust the con-trols as described above and press knobE to switch the climate control system on:the LED on the knob will come on.


57

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/DEFROSTING fig. 42(for versions/markets, where provided)

Press button A to activate; when this func-tion is on, the button LED lights up.

This function is timed and will turn off au-tomatically after 20 minutes. Press A againto switch it off in advance.

fig. 42 F0R0035m

Window demisting

In the event of considerable external mois-ture and/or rain and/or large differences intemperature inside and outside the passen-ger compartment, perform the followingpreventive window demisting procedure:



❒ turn the knob C to - or to ® if thewindows do not demist;

❒ turn the knob B to 2nd speed.

IMPORTANT The climate control systemis very useful for preventing the windowsfrom misting up in the presence of high hu-midity since it dries the air sent into thepassenger compartment.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers tothe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage.


58

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSYSTEM MAINTENANCE

In winter, the climate control system mustbe turned on at least once a month forabout 10 minutes. Before summer, havethe system checked at a Fiat Dealership.

The system uses R134a refrig-erant fluid which does not pol-lute the environment in theevent of accidental leakage.

Never use R12 fluid which is not com-patible with the system components.

IMPORTANT The internal air recircula-tion system makes it possible to reach therequired heating or cooling conditionsfaster depending on the mode selected.

Do not use the air recirculation functionon rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting.

INTERNAL AIRRECIRCULATION ACTIVATION

Move the slider D to position v toswitch internal air recirculation on.

It is advisable to switch the internal air re-circulation on whilst queuing or in tunnelsto prevent the introduction of polluted air.However, it is better not to use the func-tion for long periods, particularly if thereare many people on board, to prevent thewindows from misting inside.


59

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SAUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM (for versions/markets where provided)

GENERAL INFORMATION

The automatic climate control system ad-justs the temperature, the quantity and thedistribution of the air in the passengercompartment. The temperature controlis based on the “equivalent temperature”:in other words, the system continuouslyworks to keep the comfort level inside thevehicle constant and to compensate forpossible variations in outside conditions,including the sun’s rays detected by a ded-icated sensor.

The automatically controlled parametersand functions are:

❒ air temperature at the vents;

❒ air distribution at the vents;

❒ fan speed (continuous air flow vari-ation);

❒ compressor activation (to cool/dehumidify air);

❒ air recirculation.

All functions may be changed manually. Inother words, you may select one or morefunctions and change the parameters as re-quired. Automatic control of the manual-ly changed functions will be suspended: thesystem will override your settings only forsafety-related reasons (e.g. risk of misting).

Manual selections will always have higherpriority than automatic settings and willbe stored until the user switches the sys-tem back to automatic control by press-ing the button AUTO, except for thecases in which the system operates forparticular, safety-related reasons.

You can adjust one function manuallywithout affecting the automatic control ofthe others.

The temperature of the air sent is alwayscontrolled automatically, depending on thetemperature set in the display (exceptwhen the system is off or in certain condi-tions when the compressor is switched off).

The system allows the following functionsand parameters to be set or modifiedmanually:

❒ air temperature;

❒ fan speed (continuous variation);

❒ air distribution setting to seven positions;

❒ compressor activation;

❒ quick demisting/defrosting function;

❒ air recirculation;

❒ system deactivation.


60

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCONTROLS fig. 43

A AUTO button automatic control ofall functions.

B Air distribution selection buttons.

C Display

D MAX DEF function control button.

E System off button.

F Compressor activation/deactivationbutton.

G Air recirculation button.

H Fan speed increase/decrease controlbuttons

I Temperature increase/decrease knob.

fig. 43 F0R0148m


61

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SUSING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to start by press-ing the AUTO button and then turningthe knobs to set the temperature requiredon the display.

The system will start running automaticallyin this way and the set temperature willbe reached as quickly as possible. The sys-tem will adjust the temperature, the quan-tity and the distribution of the air sent intothe passenger compartment and, by man-aging the recirculation function, the acti-vation of the compressor.

During fully automatic operation, the on-ly manual intervention required is the pos-sible activation of the following functions:

❒ T air recirculation, to keep it al-ways on or off;

❒ Z to speed up demisting/defrosting ofwindscreen, side windows, rear win-dow and door mirrors;

During fully automatic system operation,you can change the set temperatures, airdistribution and fan speed at any time byusing the relevant buttons or knobs: thesystem will automatically change its set-tings to adjust to the new requirements.

During fully automatic operation (FULLAUTO), the wording FULL will nolonger be displayed if the air distribution,air speed, compressor and/or recircula-tion settings are changed. In this way, thefunctions will switch from automatic tomanual control until AUTO is pressedagain. With one or more functions turnedon manually, the adjustment of the intakeair temperature continues to be managedautomatically, except with the compres-sor switched off: if this is the case, thetemperature of the air sent into the pas-senger compartment cannot be lowerthan that of the outside air.

Air temperature adjustment knob (I)

Turn the knob either clockwise or coun-terclockwise to increase or lower the re-quested temperature in the passengercompartment. The set temperature isshown on the display.

Turn the knob either completely to theright or to the left to the extreme HI orLO position to use the maximum heat-ing or maximum cooling functions:

❒ Function HI (maximum heating):

select by turning the temperature knobclockwise beyond the maximum value(32°C).

This function may be used to heat up thepassenger compartment by exploiting thesystem’s potential to the full. In this event,the system stops controlling the temper-ature automatically and sets the air mix-ing to maximum heating. The air speed anddistribution are fixed.

In particular, if the heating fluid is not suf-ficiently hot, the maximum fan speed doesnot come on straight away in order to lim-it the intake of insufficiently hot air to thepassenger compartment.

All manual settings will be allowed whenthis function is on.


62

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YTo switch the function off, simply turn thetemperature knob counterclockwise andset the required temperature.

❒ LO function (maximum cooling):

select by turning the temperature knobanticlockwise beyond the minimum value(16°C).

This function may be used to cool downthe passenger compartment by exploit-ing the system’s potential to the full. In thisevent, the system stops controlling thetemperature automatically and sets the airmixing to maximum cooling. The air speedand distribution are fixed. All manual set-tings will be allowed when this functionis on.

To switch the function off, simply turn thetemperature knob clockwise and set therequired temperature.

Air distribution buttons (B)

By pressing these buttons, it is possible toset one of the seven possible air distribu-tions manually:

▲ Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost the windows.

˙ Air flow to the central and side dash-board vents to ventilate the chest andthe face in hot weather.

▼ Air flow to the front and rear footwellvents. Thanks to the natural tenden-cy of hot air to rise, this distributionpattern allows the passenger com-partment to warm up as quickly aspossible, providing an immediate feel-ing of warmth.

˙▼

Air flow distribution split betweenfootwell vents (hotter air) and centraland side dashboard vents (cooler air).This distribution mode is particularlyuseful in spring and autumn on sunnydays.

▲▼

Air flow distributed between footwellvents and windscreen and front sidewindow defrosting/demisting vents.This distribution setting allows thepassenger compartment to warm upefficiently and prevents the windowsfrom misting up.

▲˙

Air flow distributed between vents forwindscreen and side front window de-frosting/demisting vents, as well as tothe centre and side dashboard vents.This distribution makes it possible tomaintain good levels of comfort andkeep the passenger compartment suf-ficiently cool (useful in the summer).

▲˙▼

Air flow distribution split between thewindscreen and front side windows de-frosting/demisting vents, the central andside dashboard vents and the footwellvents. This distribution allows good airdiffusion and maintains a good level ofcomfort both in summer and winter.

The distribution set is shown by the cor-responding LEDs in the selected buttonscoming on.

To restore automatic air distribution con-trol after a manual selection, press the but-ton AUTO.


63

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SFan speed adjustment buttons (H)

Press button H to increase or to decreasethe fan speed and therefore the amountof air sent into the passenger compart-ment, though the required temperatureremains set.

The fan speed is shown by the lit bars onthe display:

❒ Maximum fan speed = all bars lit

❒ Minimum fan speed = one bar lit.

The fan can be switched off only if the cli-mate control compressor has beenswitched off by pressing button F-fig. 40.

IMPORTANT To restore automatic fanspeed control after a manual adjustment,press the button AUTO.

IMPORTANT At high vehicle speeds, thedynamic effect may increase the flow of airinto the passenger compartment, whichdoes not directly correspond to the fanspeed bar display.

AUTO button (A) (automatic operation)

Press the button AUTO to make the sys-tem automatically adjust the quantity anddistribution of the air sent to the passen-ger compartment. All previous manual set-tings will be cancelled.

The wording FULL AUTO will be shownon the front display in this condition.

By manually intervening on at least of thefunctions automatically managed by thesystem (air recirculation, fan speed orcompressor on/off), the wording FULLwill disappear from the display indicatingthat the system is no longer automatical-ly controlling all the functions (the tem-perature is still controlled automatically).

IMPORTANT Should the system (aftermanual settings) be no longer able to guar-antee the required temperature set in thepassenger compartment, the set temper-ature value will start flashing to indicatethis condition, then the AUTO wordingturns off.

To restore system automatic control atany time, after one or more manual ad-justments, press the button AUTO.

Air recirculation on/off button (G)

The air recirculation is managed accord-ing to the following operating logics:

❒ forced engagement (air recirculationalways on), indicated by the switch-ing on of the LED on button G andsymbol T on the display;

❒ forced release (air recirculationalways off and intake of outside air),indicated by the LED on the buttongoing off and the symbol êbeingdisplayed.

These operating conditions are obtainedby pressing air recirculation button G insequence.

IMPORTANT The engagement of the airrecirculation system makes it possible toreach the required heating or coolingconditions faster.


64

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YIt is however not advised to use recircu-lation on rainy/cold days as it would con-siderably increase the possibility of thewindows steaming up, especially if theclimate control compressor is off.

To prevent steaming up, the recircula-tion is forced off (i.e. air is drawn in fromthe outside) when the outside tempera-ture is cold.

It is advisable not to use the air recircu-lation function when the outside tem-perature is low to prevent the windowsfrom rapidly misting up.

Climate control compressor on/off button (F)

Press button √ to switch the climate con-trol compressor off (if on). The icon onthe display will go out.

Press the button when the LED is off torestore automatic system control anduse of the compressor. The icon willlight up on the display in this case.

To prevent the windows misting up, thesystem will switch the recirculation offwhen the compressor is disabled. Althoughthe system is capable of maintaining the re-quired temperature, the wording FULLwill disappear from the display. If the sys-tem is no longer able to maintain the tem-perature, the figures will flash and thewording AUTO will go out.

IMPORTANT With the compressor off,it is not possible to send air into the pas-senger compartment at a temperaturelower than that of the outside air. In cer-tain weather conditions, the windowscould mist up rapidly due to the non-de-humidified air.

The system remembers that the com-pressor has been switched off, even afterthe engine has stopped.

To restore automatic compressor control,press the button √ again (in this case, thesystem will only work as a heater) or pressthe button AUTO.

With the climate control compressor off,the fan speed can be set to zero manual-ly (no bar shown).

With the compressor enabled and theengine started, the fan speed may onlybe reduced to the minimum setting (onebar shown).


65

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SFast window demisting/defrosting button (D)

Pressing this button, the climate controlsystem will automatically switch on all thefunctions required for fast windscreen andfront side window demisting/defrosting:

❒ turns on the climate control com-pressor when weather conditions aresuitable;

❒ Switches off air recirculation;

❒ sets the maximum temperature forthe air (HI) in both zones;

❒ sets the fan speed set according to theengine coolant temperature to limitthe flow of air that is insufficientlywarm to demist the windows;

❒ directs the air flow to the windscreenand front side windows vents;

❒ turns on the heated rear window

IMPORTANT The fast demisting/defrostingfunction remains on for approximately 3 minutes, from when the engine coolantreaches a sufficient temperature for fastwindow demisting.

When this function is on, the LED of thecorresponding button switches on and thatof the heated rear window. The messageFULL AUTO goes off on the display.

You can only adjust the fan speed andswitch off the heated rear window man-ually when this function is active.

To restore operating conditions beforethis function was activated, press eitherbutton B, air recirculation button G, com-pressor button F or AUTO button A.

Switching off the system OFF (E)

Press button E to switch the climate con-trol system off. The display will go out.

The following climate control conditionswill be present when the system is off:

❒ display off;

❒ set temperature not shown;

❒ air recirculation on, passenger com-partment insulated from the outside(recirculation LED on);

❒ climate control system compressor off;

❒ fan off.

Press the AUTO button to switch the cli-mate control system back on in automat-ic mode.


66

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YEXTERNAL LIGHTS

The left stalk fig. 44/a operates most ofthe external lights.

The external lights can be switched on on-ly when the key is turned to MAR.

The instrument panel and the variousdashboard controls will come on with theexternal lights.

LIGHTS OFF

Ring nut turned to position O.

SIDE LIGHTS

Turn the ring nut to position 6.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel comes on.

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS

Turn the ring nut to position 2.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel comes on.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

When the ring nut is at 2, pull the stalktowards the steering wheel (2nd unstableposition).

The warning light 1 on the instrumentpanel will come on.

To turn the main beams off, pull the stalktowards the steering wheel again (dippedbeams will come back on).

FLASHING

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(1st temporary position) regardless of theposition of the ring nut. The warning light1 on the instrument panel will come on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSENSOR (dusk sensor) – fig. 44/b (for versions/markets, where provided)

It detects variations in brightness outsidethe vehicle depending on the light setting:the greater the sensitivity, the less outsidelight needed to activate the exterior lightsbeing turned on. The sensitivity of the dusksensor may be adjusted by means of the“Setup menu” on the instrument panel.

Activation

Turn the ring nut to position 2A : thisturns the side lights and the dipped head-lights on automatically depending on theexterior brightness conditions.

The headlights can only be flashed with thesensor on.

fig. 44/a F0R0037m fig. 44/b F0R0238m


67

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SDeactivation

The main beam headlights will switch offfollowed after approximately 10 secondsby the side/taillights, when the sensor isdeactivated.

The sensor is not capable of detecting thepresence of fog therefore, in these cir-cumstances, the lights have to be turnedon manually.

DIRECTION INDICATORS – fig. 45

Bring the stalk to the (stable) position:

❒ Up (position 1): right-hand direction in-dicator;

❒ Down (position 2): left-hand directionindicator.

The Î or ¥ lights will blink on the in-strument panel.

The indicators switch off automaticallywhen the steering wheel is straightened.

If you want the indicator to flash briefly toshow that you are about to change lane,move the stalk up or down without click-ing into position (unstable position). Whenreleased the stalk will return to its initialposition.

“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE

This allows the space surrounding the carto be lit up for a certain period of time.

Activation

With the key turned to STOP or re-moved, pull the stalk towards the steeringwheel within 2 minutes from when the en-gine is turned off.

Each time the stalk is moved, the lightsstay on for an extra 30 seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lightsare switched off automatically.

When the stalk is moved, the warning light3 on the instrument panel will light upand the corresponding message will ap-pear in the display (see “Warning lightsand messages”) as long as the function ison. The warning light comes on when thelever is operated and stays on until thefunction is automatically deactivated. Eachmovement of the stalk only increases theamount of time the lights stay on.

Deactivation

Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer-ing wheel for more than 2 seconds.

fig. 45 F0R0038m


68

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YWINDOW WASHING

The right stalk fig. 46 controls windscreenwiper/washer operation.

WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER

The device can only operate when the ig-nition key is at MAR.

The ring nut on the right stalk can bemoved to four different positions:O windscreen wiper off;

≤ intermittent operation;

≥ slow operation;

¥ fast operation.

Move the stalk to position A (unstable) tolimit operation to the time for which thestalk is held in this position. When re-leased, the stalk returns to its default po-sition, automatically stopping the wiper.

Do not use the windscreenwiper to remove layers ofsnow or ice from the wind-screen. In such conditions, the

windscreen wipers may be subjected toexcessive stress and the motor protec-tion, which prevents operation for a fewseconds, may intervene. If operation isnot restored (even after turning the keyand restarting the car engine), contacta Fiat Dealership.

With the ring nut in position ≤, thewindscreen wiper will automatically adaptto the speed of the car.

IMPORTANT Replace the wiper blades asspecified in the “Maintenance and care”section.

fig. 46 F0R0039m

“Smart washing” function

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(unstable position) to operate the wind-screen washer.

Keeping the lever pulled for more thanhalf a second, with just one movement itis possible to operate the washer jet andthe wiper at the same time.

The wiper stops working three strokes af-ter the stalk is released.

A further stroke 6 seconds later com-pletes the wiping operation.


69

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SActivation

Move the right stalk ring nut to ≤fig. 46.

The activation of the sensor is signalled bya “stroke” to show that the command hasbeen acquired.

Through the setup menu it is possible toincrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

The increasing of the rain sensor sensi-tivity is signalled by a “stroke” to showthat the command has been acquired.

If the windscreen washer is used with therain sensor activated, the normal wash-ing cycle is performed, after which the rainsensor resumes its normal automatic op-eration.

Deactivation

Move the stalk ring nut from position ≤fig. 46 or turn the ignition key to STOP.

At the next start-up (key at MAR), thesensor will not be reactivated even if thering nut is at ≤ fig. 46. To reactivatethe sensor, move the ring nut from posi-tion ≤ to any other position and thenreturn it to position ≤.

Rain sensor activation will be indicated byat least one wiper “stroke” even if thewindscreen is dry.

The rain sensor is able to recognise, andautomatically adjust itself in the presenceof the following conditions:

❒ impurities on the surface (salt, dirt,etc.);

❒ difference between day and night.

IMPORTANT Streaks of water may causethe blades to move when not desired.

RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets where provided)

The rain sensor is located behind the rearview mirror in contact with the wind-screen and has the purpose of automati-cally adjusting the frequency of thewindscreen wiper strokes depending onthe intensity of the rain during intermit-tent operation.

IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the sen-sor area clean.


70

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCRUISE CONTROL (for versions/markets where provided)

This is an electronically controlled drivingassistance device which allows the vehicleto be driven at a chosen speed above 30 km/h on long stretches of dry, straightroads with few variations (e.g. motor-ways), without having to depress the ac-celerator pedal.

It is therefore not recommended to usethis device on extra-urban roads with traf-fic. Do not use it in town.

ENGAGING THE DEVICE

Turn the ring nut A-fig. 47 to ON.

The device cannot be engaged in first orreverse gear. It is advisable to engage itin 4th gear or higher.

When travelling downhill with the deviceengaged, the vehicle speed may slightly ex-ceed the preset one.

When the device is activated, warning lightÜ comes on together with the relevantmessage in the instrument panel (for ver-sions/markets where provided).

STORING THE SPEED

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn the ring nut A-fig. 47 to ON andpress the accelerator pedal to bring thecar to the required speed;

❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for atleast one second, then release it. Thecar speed is now memorised and youcan therefore come off the accelera-tor pedal.

If needed (when overtaking for instance),you can accelerate simply by depressingthe accelerator pedal; when you releasethe pedal, the vehicle goes back to thespeed set previously.

fig. 47 F0R0041m


71

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SRESTORING THE MEMORISED SPEED

If the device has been switched off, for ex-ample by depressing the brake or clutchpedal, the memorised speed can be re-stored as follows:

❒ accelerate gradually until reaching a speed approaching the memorisedspeed;

❒ engage the gear selected at the time ofspeed memorising;

❒ press the button RES B-fig. 47.

INCREASING THE MEMORISED SPEED

This can be done in two ways:

❒ by pressing the accelerator and thenmemorising the new speed reached;

or

❒ moving the stalk upwards (+).

Each movement of the stalk correspondsto an increase in speed of about 1 km/h,while keeping the stalk held upwards willcontinuously increase the speed.

REDUCING THE MEMORISED SPEED

This can be done in two ways:

❒ by turning the device off and then stor-ing a new speed;

or

❒ by moving the stalk downwards (−) un-til reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

Each movement of the lever correspondsto a slight reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held down-wards will decrease the speed continu-ously.

TURNING THE DEVICE OFF

The device can be switched off by the dri-ver in the following ways:

❒ turning the ring nut A to the OFF po-sition;

❒ switching off the engine;

❒ pressing the brake pedal;

❒ pressing the clutch pedal;

❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in thiscase the system is not really switchedoff but the request for accelerationtakes priority over the system. Thecruise control is however active and itwill not be necessary to press buttonRES B-fig. 47 to resume previous con-ditions after acceleration has ended.

The device is automatically switched off inthe following cases:

❒ with activation of ABS or ESP systems;

❒ if the car speed drops below the presetlimit;

❒ if there is a system failure.

When travelling with the de-vice on, never set the gear

lever to neutral.

WARNING

In the event of device faults or failures, turn the ring nut A

to OFF and contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING


72

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YROOF LIGHTS

FRONT ROOF LIGHTS WITH SPOT LIGHTS, fig. 48/aAND WITH DIFFUSEDLIGHTING LEDS, fig. 48/b(for versions/markets, where provided)

The switch A turns on/off the roof lights.

With the switch A in central position, thelights C and D turn on/off when open-ing/closing the front doors.

With the switch A pressed on the leftside, the lights C and D will always stayoff. With the switch A pressed on theright side, the lights C and D will alwaysstay on.

Lights switch on/off progressively.

The switch B controls the spot light func-tion; when the roof light is off, it switch-es on individually:

❒ the light C when pressed on the left;

❒ the light D when pressed on the right.

IMPORTANT Before getting out of thecar, make sure both switches are in themiddle position; when the doors areclosed, lights switch off preventing the bat-tery from running down.

In any case, if the switch is left in the onposition, the roof light switches off auto-matically 15 minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off.

fig. 48/a F0R0043m

REAR ROOF LIGHT WITHMOVABLE LENS(for versions/markets where provided)

The light will turn on/off by pressing themovable lens on the right or left side, as shown in fig. 49.

fig. 48/b F0R0240m

fig. 49 F0R0042m


73

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SRoof light timing

On certain versions, to facilitate gettingin/out of the car at night or in poorly-lit ar-eas, two timed modes have been provided.

TIMING WHEN GETTING INTO THE CAR

The roof lights switch on according to thefollowing modes:

❒ for about 10 seconds when unlockingthe front doors;

❒ for about 3 minutes when opening oneof the side doors;

❒ for about 10 seconds when closing thedoors.

The timed period is interrupted when theignition is turned to MAR.

TIMING WHEN GETTING OUT OF THE CAR

After removing the key from the ignition,the roof lights switch on according to thefollowing modes:

❒ within 2 minutes from turning the en-gine off for about 10 seconds;

❒ when opening one of the side doors forabout 3 minutes;

❒ when one of the doors is closed for a period of about 10 seconds.

The timed period stops automaticallywhen the doors are locked.


74

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

COURTESY LIGHTS fig. 53(for versions/markets where provided)

Roof lights B by the side of the courtesymirror will light up when the cover A onthe sun visor on driver’s or passenger’sside is raised with the key at MAR. Thelights allows the courtesy mirror to beused even in poor light conditions.

IMPORTANT The lights may only be op-erated for 15 minutes when the key isturned to stop STOP. They will be au-tomatically switched off after this to pro-tect the battery charge.

fig. 51 F0R0044m fig. 53

BB

A

F0R0216mfig. 52 F0R0045m

BOOT ROOF LIGHT fig. 51(for versions/markets where provided)

For versions fitted with boot light, it willturn on automatically when opening thetailgate and it will turn off when closing.

PUDDLE LIGHTS fig. 52(for versions/markets where provided)

The roof light A located in the doorsswitches on when opening the relevantdoor, regardless of the ignition key position.


75

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SCONTROLS

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS fig. 55

They are turned on by pressing switch A,regardless of the position of the ignitionkey.

When the device is on, the switch flashesand warning lights Î and ¥ on the clus-ter come on.

Press the switch again to turn the lights off.

The use of hazard lights is governed bythe Highway Code of the country you arein. Comply with the prescriptions.

GLOVE BOX LIGHT, fig. 54(for versions/markets where provided)

On versions where it is fitted, the lightcomes on automatically when the glovebox is opened and goes out when it isclosed.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS fig. 56 (for versions/markets where provided)

To turn the front fog lights on, press thebutton 5 with the side lights on.

The warning light 5 in the instrumentpanel will come on.

Press the button again to turn the lights off.

The use of fog lights is governed by thehighway code of the country you are in.Comply with the prescriptions.

fig. 55 F0R0047mfig. 54 F0R0305m

fig. 56 F0R0048m


76

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

DOOR LOCK fig. 59

To open: pull opening lever A.

To close: close the door and press leverA. The rear doors will also be locked inthis way (version with central locking).

The warning light ´ comes on with thecorresponding message on the multifunc-tion display (see chapter “Warning lightsand messages”) when a door is not cor-rectly locked.

fig. 58 F0R0035m

HEATED REAR WINDOW fig. 58(for versions/markets where provided)

Press button A to activate. The device willbe switched off automatically after ap-proximately 20 minutes.

fig. 59 F0R0023m

REAR FOG LIGHTS fig. 57

These lights come on, with the dippedheadlights on or with the side lights andfog lights on (for versions/markets whereprovided) by pressing the button 4.

The warning light 4 in the instrument pan-el will come on.

Press the button again to turn the lightsoff or turn off the dipped beam headlightsand/or the front fog lights (for versions/markets where provided).

The use of rear fog lights is governed by thehighway code of the country you are in.Comply with legal requirements.

fig. 57 F0R0049m


77

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SDoor unlocking in the event of an accident

If the fuel cut-off switch trips following anaccident, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to allow access to the passengercompartment and the ceiling lights will beswitched on at the same time. The doorscan always be opened from the inside ofthe car by using the appropriate controls.

If, after a collision, no fuel leakage is foundand the car can be restarted, restore thefuel cut-off switch proceeding as follows.

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH

The car is fitted with a safety switch that,in the event of a crash, comes into oper-ation by cutting off fuel and turning off theengine.

In this way, this device prevents fuel leaksdue to fuel pipe breaking.

IMPORTANT After a crash, remember toremove the electronic key from the igni-tion switch to prevent the battery fromrunning down.

Fuel cut-off switch activation is indicatedby the message “FPS on” on the digital dis-play.

On the multifunction display, the message“Fuel cut-off switch on, see Handbook”is displayed.

If, after a collision, you smellfuel or notice leaks from the

fuel system, do not reset the switch toavoid fire risk.

WARNING

If the central door lockingsystem was operated from

inside the car and the fuel cut-offswitch did not succeed in automati-cally releasing the doors after a col-lision, the passenger compartmentcannot be accessed from the outside.Door opening from outside dependson their conditions after the collision:if a door is damaged, it may be im-possible to open it. In this case, try toopen the other doors of the car.

WARNING

Restoring the fuel cut-off switch

Before restoring the fuel cut-off switch, carefully check

for fuel leaks.

WARNING

To reset the fuel cut-out switch, press thebutton A-fig. 60.

fig. 60 F0R0208m


78

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

fig. 62 F0R0077m

fig. 61 F0R0104m fig. 63 F0R0078m

INTERIOR FITTINGS

GLOVE COMPARTMENT fig. 61-62

Use the handle A-fig. 61, to open theglove compartment drawer.

The drawer opening movement is con-trolled by a suitable device.

Inside the drawer there is a space A-fig. 62to keep documents.

When the drawer is opened, an internalcourtesy light switches on.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

The oddment compartment A-fig. 63, is located on the dashboard, on the leftof the steering wheel.


79

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

DOOR POCKETS fig. 66

There are document/map pockets locat-ed in each of the door panels.

FRONT ARMREST WITHSTORAGE COMPARTMENT (for versions/markets where provided)

Certain versions are fitted with an arm-rest A-fig. 67 between the front seats.

To use it as an armrest, push it down asshown in fig. 68.

Press the button A-fig. 68 to raise the up-per part of the armrest and access com-partment B. Operate the lever C to lowerthe angle of the armrest.

fig. 64 F0R0053m

fig. 65 F0R0054m fig. 67 F0R0056m

fig. 68 F0R0057mfig. 66 F0R0055m

The oddment compartment B-fig. 64 islocated in the middle of the dashboard.

CENTRAL CONSOLE GLOVECOMPARTMENT

The compartment A-fig. 65 is located inthe middle of the dashboard.


80

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

CIGAR LIGHTER – fig. 72(for versions/markets where provided)

This is located on the central tunnel infront of the handbrake.

Press button A to activate the cigar lighterwith ignition key at MAR.

After about 15 seconds the button will re-turn to its original position automaticallyand the cigar lighter is ready for use.

IMPORTANT Always make sure the cig-ar lighter is switched off.

fig. 72 F0R0061m

The cigar lighter gets veryhot. Handle it carefully and

make sure that children don’t touchit: risk of fire and/or burning.

WARNING

CUP HOLDER – CAN HOLDERfig. 69-70

There are two cup/can holders in the cen-tral tunnel (two in front of the gear leverand one behind it).

CARD HOLDER – CD HOLDERfig. 71

The central tunnel features slots for tele-phone cards, CDs, magnetic cards or mo-torway toll tickets.

fig. 69 F0R0058m fig. 71 F0R0060m

fig. 70 F0R0059m


81

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

ASHTRAY – fig. 73-74(for versions/markets where provided)

The ashtray is a removable plastic box thatcan be fitted into the cup/can holders onthe central console.

IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray asa waste paper basket at the same time: firehazard.

SUN VISORS – fig. 75

They are located at the sides of the inte-rior rear view mirror. They can be ad-justed forwards and sideways.

A courtesy mirror may be present on theback of the sun visors.

To use the mirror (for versions/marketswhere provided), on some versions youneed to open the sliding cover A.

A roof light may light up, according to theversion, when the cover is opened.

fig. 73 F0R0062m fig. 75 F0R0064m fig. 76 F0R0065m

fig. 74 F0R0063m

DOCUMENT HOLDER POCKET (for versions/markets where provided)

On certain versions a map pocket is locat-ed on the back of the seat backrest fig. 76.


82

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YDOORS

DOOR CENTRALLOCKING/UNLOCKING

Locking from the outside

With the doors closed, press the buttonÁ on the remote control fig. 77 or insertand turn the metal insert in the driver’sside door lock clockwise fig. 78 (coun-terclockwise on the passenger door ). TheLED on the driver’s door will blink onceto indicate that the doors have beenlocked. The doors will only be locked ifall doors are shut. If one or more doorsare open, the direction indicators and theLED on the driver’s door will flash quick-ly for approximately 3 seconds if one ormore doors are open when the button Áon the remote control is pressed, fig. 77.

If instead one or more doors are openedafter turning the metal insert of the key,only the LED on the driver’s door will flashquickly for approximately three seconds.If the doors are closed but the boot isopen, the doors are locked: the directionindicators (only when locking is carriedout using the button Á fig. 77) and theLED on the driver’s side door flash quick-ly for approximately 3 seconds.

Door unlocking from the outside

Briefly press button Ë fig. 77 to achieve re-mote door unlocking, timed roof light op-eration, direction indicator double flashingor insert the metal insert into the driver’sdoor lock and turn it counterclockwise.

fig. 78 F0R0067m

fig. 79 F0R0000m

Door locking/unlocking from the inside

Press the lever A-fig. 79 to unlock alldoors. Pull the lever to unlock all doors.A LED on the driver’s door will indicatethe state (doors locked or unlocked) ofthe car. The LED is on when the doors arelocked and off when the doors are un-locked. The doors will be locked only if allthe doors are properly shut.

In the absence of electrical power supply(blown fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) itis still possible to lock the doors manually.

After exceeding a speed of 20 km/h, alldoors will be centrally locked automati-cally if the setup menu function has beenselected (see paragraph “Multifunctiondisplay” in this section).

fig. 77 F0R0066m


83

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

CHILD LOCK – fig. 80

This system prevents the rear doors frombeing opened from the inside. This devicecan be engaged only with the doors open.❒ position 1 – engaged (door locked);❒ position 2 – disengaged (door can be

opened from inside).The device A-fig. 80 stays on even if thedoors are unlocked by the electric cen-tral locking system.

fig. 80 F0R0068m

Always use this device whentransporting children. After

engaging the child lock on both reardoors, check for proper engagementby trying to open a rear door with theinternal handle.

WARNING

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

The driver’s door armrest features twofig. 82 or five (for versions/markets whereprovided) fig. 81 switches that with keyat MAR control:

A opening/closing of the left front window;

B opening/closing of the right frontwindow;

C opening/closing of the left rear win-dow (for versions/markets whereprovided);

D opening/closing of the right rear win-dow (for versions/markets where provided);

E inhibition of all the controls located onthe rear doors (for versions/marketswhere provided).

fig. 81 F0R0200m

fig. 82 F0R0201m

Automatic continuous operation(for versions/markets, where provided)

The electric windows are fitted with a mechanism for driver’s side raising andlowering; all other windows are onlylowered.


84

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

Front passenger’s side and rear doors (for versions/markets where provided)

Front passenger’s door armrest and reardoor armrests feature the switches A-fig. 83 for controlling the corre-sponding window.

Press button A-fig. 84 to inhibit the con-trols located on the rear doors (for ver-sions/markets where provided).

fig. 83 F0R0069m fig. 84 F0R0000m

The continuous operation of the windowis activated by pressing a switch for morethan half a second. The window will stopwhen it is fully opened or closed, or whenthe button is pressed again.

IMPORTANT With the ignition key atSTOP or removed, the power windowsremain activated for about 2 minutes andare deactivated as soon a door is opened.

The system conforms to the2000/4/EC standard concern-

ing the safety of passengers leaningout of the passenger compartment.

WARNING

WARNING On some versions, pressingthe remote control button Ë for over 2 seconds will open the windows, where-as pressing the remote control button Áfor over 2 seconds will close them.


85

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SElectric window systeminitialisation

The system must be re-initialised after dis-connecting the battery or if the relevantprotection fuse is blown.

Initialisation procedure:

❒ fully close the window to be initialisedmanually;

❒ once fully closed, hold down the clos-ing control for at least 1 second.

Improper use of the electricwindows can be dangerous.

Before and during operation, alwayscheck that no-one is exposed to therisk of being injured either directly bythe moving window or through ob-jects getting caught or by being hit.When leaving the vehicle, always re-move the key from the ignition toavoid the risk of injury to anyone re-maining in the car due to accidentaloperation of the electric windows.

WARNING

REAR WINDOW WINDERS fig. 85(for versions/markets where provided)

To open and to close the window, use therelevant handle.

fig. 85 F0R0070m


86

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YLUGGAGECOMPARTMENT

OPENING THE TAILGATE

The tailgate lock may be released from theoutside of the car by pressing the buttonR on the remote control fig. 86 or bypressing the button B-fig. 87.

fig. 86 F0R0071m

Putting additional objects on-to the parcel shelf or tailgate(speakers, spoiler, etc.), ex-cept when approved by the

manufacturer, can affect the correctoperation of the side gas shock ab-sorbers of the tailgate itself.

When using the luggagecompartment, never exceed

the maximum admissible loads (seethe “Technical specifications” sec-tion). Make sure that the objects arewell arranged in the luggage com-partment so that they will not be pro-jected forwards following suddenbraking, causing injury to passengers.

WARNING

When travelling, do not putany object on the parcel

shelf because they can injure passen-gers in the event of an accident orsudden braking.

WARNING

fig. 87

B

F0R0239m


87

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SCLOSING THE TAILGATE

To close the tailgate, lower it onto thelock until you hear it click.

fig. 90 F0R0075m fig. 91 F0R0076m

EXTENDING THE BOOT

Partial extension (1/3 or 2/3) fig. 91(for versions/markets where provided)

The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) ortotally extended by splitting the rear seat.

Proceed as follows:

❒ tilt the cushions forward;

❒ pull the retainers A fig. 90 upwards torelease the left or right side of the back-rest and fold the backrest on the cushion.

Extending the boot on the right sidemakes it possible to carry two passengerson the left part of the rear seat.

Extending the boot on the left side allowsyou to carry one passenger on the rightpart of the rear seat.


88

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

fig. 93 F0R0078m

Repositioning the rear seat – fig. 93

Lift the backrests and push them back un-til your hear both fastening mechanismsclick and return the cushions to the stan-dard position.

IMPORTANT When returning the back-rest to the standard position, make sureit is correctly fastened and you hear it clickinto place.

Maximum extension – fig. 92

Tilting the rear seat completely forwardsallows maximum loading volume.

Proceed as follows:

❒ fully lower the rear seat head restraints;

❒ tilt the cushions forward;

❒ pull the retainers A-fig. 90 upwards torelease the backrests and fold them on-to the cushion.

fig. 92 F0R0077m

Make sure the backrest isproperly secured at both

sides to prevent it moving forward inthe event of sharp braking, causing in-juries to passengers.

WARNING


89

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SBONNET

OPENING

Proceed as follows:

❒ pull the lever fig. 94 in the directionof the arrow;

❒ pull the lever A-fig. 95 as shown in thediagram;

❒ lift the bonnet and at the same time re-lease the support rod D-fig. 96 fromits locking device, then insert the endC-fig. 97 of the rod into the recess Eon the bonnet.

IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,check that windscreen wiper arms are notlifted from the windscreen.

CLOSURE

Proceed as follows:

❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand andwith the other remove the rod C-fig. 97from the recess E and fit it back into itscatch D-fig. 96;

❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres from the engine com-partment, then let it drop. Make surethat the bonnet is completely closedand not fastened only by the safetycatch. If it is not perfectly closed, do nottry to press the bonnet lid down butopen it and repeat the procedure.

IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-net is closed properly to avoid it openingwhile the car is travelling.

fig. 94 F0R0080m

fig. 95 F0R0079m fig. 97 F0R0082m

fig. 96 F0R0081m


90

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YThe bonnet must always beperfectly closed while trav-

elling for safety reasons. Therefore,always check that the hood has beencorrectly closed and that the lock hasbeen engaged. If you notice whilst dri-ving that the lock is not perfectly en-gaged, stop at once and close thebonnet properly.

WARNING

The incorrect positioning ofthe support rod could cause

the bonnet to fall suddenly.

WARNING

Only carry out these opera-tions with the vehicle sta-

tionary.

WARNING

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK

The front attachments are located atpoints A-fig. 98.

The front attachments are located atpoints B.

IMPORTANT Follow the instructionscontained in the assembly kit carefully. As-sembly must be performed by qualifiedpersonnel.

fig. 98 F0R0217m

Check that the attachmentfixing screws are tight after

a few kilometres.

WARNING

Fully comply with the regula-tions in force concerning max-imum clearance.

Distribute the load evenlyand, when driving, bear in

mind the increased sensitivity of thevehicle to side wind.

WARNING

Never exceed the maximumpermitted loads (see “Tech-nical specifications” section).


91

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SHEADLIGHTS

LIGHT BEAM AIMING

The correct direction of the headlights isessential for the comfort and safety of thedriver and other road users. The head-lights must be correctly directed to ensureoptimum visibility. Contact a Fiat Dealer-ship to have the headlights checked andadjusted.

HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENTCORRECTOR

This device works with the key at MARand the dipped beam headlights on. Thecar will tilt backwards when it is loaded,raising the light beam. The beams musttherefore be realigned in this case.

Headlight alignment adjustment fig. 99

To adjust, press buttons Ò and on thecontrol panel.

The display located on the instrumentpanel provides a visual indication of the ad-justment position.

Position 0 – one or two passengers onfront seats.

Position 1 – five people.

Position 2 – five people + load in the boot.

Position 3 – driver + maximum permittedload in the boot.

IMPORTANT Check the light beam align-ment every time the load transportedchanges.

FOG LIGHT AIMING (for versions/markets where provided)

Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the head-lights checked and adjusted.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTSWHEN ABROAD

The dipped headlights are directed for op-eration in the country where the vehiclewas originally purchased. When in coun-tries where you drive on the other side ofthe road, you need to alter the beam di-rection by affixing a specially designed self-adhesive film in order not to dazzle thevehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion. Such film is provided by Lineacces-sori Fiat and is available at Fiat Dealerships.

fig. 99 F0R0083m


92

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YABS SYSTEM

This system, which is an integral part of thebraking system, prevents one or morewheels from locking and slipping in all roadsurface conditions, irrespective of the in-tensity of the braking action, ensuring thatthe vehicle can be controlled even duringemergency braking.

The system is completed by EBD (Elec-tronic Brakeforce Distribution), which dis-tributes the braking action between frontand rear wheels.

IMPORTANT For the maximum efficiencyof the braking system, a bedding-in periodof about 500 km is needed (for a new ve-hicle or after having replaced the brakepads/discs): during this period it is betterto avoid sharp, repeated and prolongedbraking.

ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION

The driver can tell the ABS system has beenactivated because the brake pedal pulsatesslightly and the system gets noisier: thismeans that the speed should be altered tosuit the type of road surface.

The ABS gets the most outof the available grip, but it

cannot increase it; you must there-fore always take care when drivingon slippery roads. Do not take anyunnecessary risks.

WARNINGMECHANICAL BRAKE ASSIST (emergency braking assistance) (for versions/markets where provided)

This system, which cannot be deactivated,recognises emergency braking conditions(according to the brake pedal operationspeed) and provides an additional hy-draulic braking pressure to support thatprovided by the driver. This allows fasterand more powerful operation of the brak-ing system.

IMPORTANT When the MechanicalBrake Assist is activated noises can beheard from the system. This is normal. Inany case, while braking keep the brakepedal firmly pressed.

If the ABS intervenes, it meansyou have almost reached

the grip limit between the tyres andthe road surface: slow down to makesure you can use the available grip.

WARNING

When the ABS intervenesand you notice the brake

pedal pulsating, do not be afraid tokeep the pedal pushed down. This willhelp you to stop in the shortest dis-tance possible, depending on the roadconditions.

WARNING


93

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SFAILURE INDICATIONS

ABS failure

This is indicated by the > warning lighton the instrument panel together with thededicated message on the multifunctiondisplay (for versions/markets where pro-vided) coming on (see “Warning lights andmessages” section).

In this case, the braking system will still beeffective, although without the extra ca-pacity offered by the ABS system. Drivecarefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership tohave the system checked.

ESP SYSTEM (Electronic StabilityProgram) (for versions/markets where provided)

This is an electronic system controlling carstability in the event of tyre grip loss, help-ing to maintain directional control.

The ESP system is therefore particularlyuseful when road surface grip changes.

In addition to the ESP system, ASR systemand Hill Holder, the MSR system (adjustingthe engine braking torque) and the HBAsystem (improving the braking force duringemergency braking) are also provided (forversions/markets where provided).

SYSTEM INTERVENTION

It is signalled by the flashing of the warn-ing light á on the instrument panel, to in-form the driver that the car is in criticalstability and grip conditions.

EBD failure

This is indicated by the > and x warn-ing lights on the instrument panel togetherwith the dedicated message on the multi-function display (for versions/marketswhere provided) coming on (see “Warn-ing lights and messages” section).

In this case, the rear wheels may suddenlylock and the vehicle may swerve whenbraking sharply. Drive carefully to thenearest Fiat Dealership to have the systemchecked.

If only the x warning lighton the instrument panel

lights up (together with a message inthe multifunction display, for ver-sions/markets where provided) stopthe vehicle immediately and contactthe nearest Fiat Dealership. Fluidleaking from the hydraulic system willcompromise the operation of thebraking system, whether it is of theconventional type or with ABS.

WARNING


94

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSYSTEM ACTIVATION

The ESP system is automatically activatedwhen the car is started and cannot be de-activated.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

In the event of a failure, the ESP will be au-tomatically switched off and the á warn-ing light will switch on constantly in theinstrument panel along with a message inthe multifunction display (for versions/markets where provided) (see “Warninglights and messages” section). The LED onthe ASR OFF button will also light up.Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as pos-sible if this happens.

ESP performance featuresmust not induce the driver to

take unnecessary or unfounded risks.Your driving style must always besuited to the road conditions, visibil-ity and traffic. The driver is ultimatelyresponsible for road safety.

WARNING

HILL HOLDER SYSTEM

This system is an integral part of the ESPsystem and it is provided to facilitate start-ing on hills.

It is automatically activated in the follow-ing conditions:

❒ uphill: car at a standstill on a road witha gradient higher than 5%, engine run-ning, clutch and brake pedal pressed,gearbox in neutral or gear engagedother than reverse.

❒ downhill: car at a standstill on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, clutch and brake pedal pressedand reverse engaged.

When setting off, the ESP system controlunit will maintain the braking pressure onthe wheels until the necessary torque forstarting is reached or, in any case, for amaximum of 2 seconds in order to facili-tate moving easily from the brake pedal tothe accelerator pedal.

When two seconds have elapsed, withoutstarting, the system is automatically de-activated, gradually releasing the brakingpressure.

On release, the typical brake disengage-ment noise indicating that the car is go-ing to move will be heard.

Failure indications

Warning light è on the instrument panelwill light up in the event of a failure (see“Warning lights and messages”).

IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system isnot a parking brake; therefore, never leavethe vehicle without having engaged thehandbrake, turned the engine off engagedthe first gear.

For the correct operation ofthe ESP and ASR systems,

the tyres must be the same make andtype on all wheels, in perfect condi-tion and, above all, of the type, makeand size specified.

WARNING


95

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

S

MSR system (engine drive regulation)

This is an integral part of the ASR systemthat, in the event of sudden gear shiftingon hills, cuts in to provide torque to theengine, thus preventing excessive drivewheel drag which, especially in poor gripconditions, can lead to loss of stability.

Switching the system on/offThe ASR system switches on automaticallyeach time the engine is started. When travelling, the ASR can be switchedoff and on again by pressing button A-fig.100, located among the controls on thedashboard.

If the system is off, the LED on the buttonlights up together with a message shownon the multifunction display (for ver-sions/markets where provided).If the ASR is switched off when travelling,it will turn on again automatically the nexttime the engine is started.When travelling on snowy roads withsnow chains, it may be helpful to turn theASR off: in fact, in these conditions, theslipping of the drive wheels when movingoff makes it possible to get better traction.

For the correct operation ofthe ESP and ASR systems,

the tyres must be the same make andtype on all wheels, in perfect condi-tion and, above all, of the type, makeand size specified.

WARNING

fig. 100

ASROFF

A

F0R0218m

ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulator)This system controls car traction andintervenes automatically every time oneor both driving wheels slip.

Depending on the slipping conditions, twodifferent control systems are activated:

❒ if the slipping involves both drivewheels, the ASR function intervenes byreducing the power transmitted by theengine;

❒ if the slipping only involves only onedrive wheel, the ASR system cuts inby automatically braking the wheelthat is slipping.

The ASR system is particularly helpful inthe following circumstances:

❒ slipping of the inner wheel when cor-nering due to the effect of dynamicload changes or excessive acceleration;

❒ too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the condi-tions of the road surface;

❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or icysurfaces;

❒ loss of grip on a wet surface (aqua-planing).


96

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YDo not take unnecessaryrisks, even if your vehicle is

fitted with this system. Your drivingstyle must always be suited to theroad conditions, visibility and traffic.The driver is always responsible forroad safety.

WARNING

For correct operation of the ASR system,the tyres must be of the same brand andtype on all wheels, in perfect conditionsand, above all, of the type, brand and sizerecommended.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

In the event of a failure, the ASR systemwill be automatically switched off andwarning light á will switch on constantlyon the instrument panel along with a mes-sage on the multifunction display (for ver-sions/markets where provided) (seechapter “Warning lights and messages”).In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible.

EOBD SYSTEM(for versions/markets where provided)

The EOBD system (European On BoardDiagnostic) is a diagnosis system installedon the ECUs, which detects and reportspossible malfunctions in the electronic sys-tems that could worsen emissions.

The goal of the system is to:

❒ Keep the system efficiency under control;

❒ Warn when a car failure causes emis-sions levels to increase;

❒ Warn of the need to replace deterio-rated components.

It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument panel(together with relevant message on themultifunction display), when these com-ponents are damaged; it can also reportany system malfunctions (see chapter“Warning lights and messages”).

Note The car has a diagnosis connectorthat can be interfaced with appropriate in-struments, to read the error codes mem-orised in the electronic control unitstogether with a series of specific parame-ters for engine operation and diagnosis.This check can also be carried out by thetraffic control authorities.

IMPORTANT After an operation at theFiat Dealership, aimed at solving malfunc-tions linked to the EOBD system, somebench tests should be made, along withroad tests if necessary, for a completecheck of the system. The latter may alsorequire the car to cover a long distance.

If, when the ignition key isturned to the MAR position,the U warning light eitherdoes not come on or, when

driving, it switches on constantly orflashes (along with a message in themultifunction display for versions/markets where provided), contact aFiat Dealership as soon as possible. Theoperation of the warning light Umaybe checked by the traffic control au-thorities using specific devices. Complywith the laws and regulations of thecountry where you are driving.


97

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SPARKING SENSORS (for versions/markets where provided)

Parking sensors are located in the rearbumper fig. 101 and their function is toinform the driver, through an intermittentacoustic signal, about the presence of ob-stacles behind the car.

ACTIVATION

The sensors are automatically activatedwhen reverse gear is engaged.

As the obstacle behind the vehicle getscloser to the car, the acoustic signal be-comes more frequent.

ACOUSTIC SIGNAL

When reverse gear is engaged an inter-mittent acoustic signal is automatically ac-tivated.

The acoustic signal:

❒ becomes louder as the distance be-tween car and obstacle decreases;

❒ becomes continuous when the dis-tance between the car and the obsta-cle is less than around 30 cm and stopsimmediately if the distance increases;

❒ is constant if the distance is unvaried;if this situation occurs for the side sen-sors, the beeping will stop after about3 seconds to avoid, for example, warn-ing indications in the event of ma-noeuvres alongside walls.

Detection distances

Central operating range 150 cm

Side operating range 60 cm

If several obstacles are detected by the sen-sors, only the nearest one is considered.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

Any parking sensor failures will be indi-cated when reverse is engaged by the twarning light in the instrument panel to-gether with the message in the multi-function display coming on (for versions/markets where provided) (see chapter“Warning lights and messages”).

fig. 101 F0R0084m


98

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YGENERAL WARNINGS

❒ When parking, watch out for obstaclesthat may be above or under the sensors.

❒ Sometimes, objects placed close to thecar are not detected and could there-fore cause damage to the car or bedamaged themselves.

❒ Indications sent by the sensors can bealtered by dirt, snow or ice depositedon the sensors or by ultrasonic systems(e.g. truck pneumatic brakes or pneu-matic hammers) near the car.

For correct operation, sensorsmust always be clean frommud, dirt, snow or ice. Becareful not to scratch or dam-

age the sensors while cleaning them.Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths.The sensors should be washed usingclean water with the addition of carshampoo if necessary.

Parking manoeuvres howeverare always the driver’s re-

sponsibility. When making these ma-noeuvres, always make sure that nopeople (especially children) or animalsare present in your maneuveringspace. The parking sensors serve to as-sist the driver, but must never allow hisor her attention to lapse during po-tentially dangerous manoeuvres, eventhose executed at low speeds.

WARNINGOPERATION WITH TRAILER

Sensor operation is automatically deacti-vated when the trailer’s electric cable plugis fitted in the car’s tow hook socket.

The sensors are automatically enabled againwhen the trailer’s cable plug is removed.

When using special washing equipmentsuch as high pressure jets or steam clean-ing, clean the sensors very quickly keep-ing the jet more than 10 cm away.


99

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSOUND SYSTEM(for versions/markets, where provided)

For the operation of the radio with CD/MP3 CD player (for versions/marketswhere provided), read the Supplementattached to this Owner Handbook.

PROVISION FOR THE SOUND SYSTEM (for versions/markets where provided)

The system consists of:

❒ sound system power cables;❒ front and rear speaker connecting

wires;❒ aerial power wire;❒ 4 speakers (2 full range at the front

and 2 full range at the back);❒ radio aerial cable❒ aerial.

fig. 102 F0R0085m

For connection to the cablesprovided, contact a Fiat Deal-

ership to prevent any problem thatcould impair car safety.

WARNING

SOUND SYSTEMINSTALLATION

The sound system must be installed in theplace occupied by the central storagecompartment because this makes the ca-bles provided accessible.

Lower the fasteners shown in fig. 102 toremove the container.

LIGHT PROVISION FOR SOUND SYSTEM (for versions/markets where provided)

The system consists of:❒ sound system power cables;❒ front and rear speaker connecting

wires;❒ aerial power wire;❒ radio aerial cable.


100

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YRADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES

Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mo-bile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.)cannot be used inside the car unless a sep-arate aerial is mounted on the roof.

IMPORTANT The use of these devices in-side the passenger compartment (withouta separate aerial) may cause the vehicleelectrical systems to malfunction. Thiscould compromise safety in addition toconstituting a potential hazard for pas-sengers’ health.

In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by theshielding effect of the car body.

As far as the use of EC-approved mobilephones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS),follow the usage instructions provided bythe mobile phone manufacturer.

INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Electrical and electronic devices installed af-ter buying the car in the context of after-sales service must carry the following label:

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. authorisesthe installation of transceivers providedthat installation is carried out at a spe-cialised centre, in a workmanlike fashionand in compliance with manufacturer’sspecifications.

IMPORTANT Traffic control authoritiesmay not allow the car on the road if de-vices have been installed which modify thefeatures of the car. This may also cause in-validation of warranty in relation to faultscaused by the change or either directly orindirectly related to it.

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. shall not beliable for damage caused by the installationof accessories either not supplied or rec-ommended by Fiat Group AutomobilesS.p.A. and/or not installed in compliancewith the instructions provided.


101

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SREFUELLING THE CAR

PETROL ENGINES

Use only unleaded petrol.

To avoid mistakes, the diameter of the fuelfiller is too small to introduce the nozzleof leaded petrol pumps. The petrol octanerating (RON) must not be lower than 95.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalytic con-verter leads to harmful exhaust emissions,thus contributing to air pollution.

IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,even in small amounts or in an emergency,as this would damage the catalytic con-verter beyond repair.

DIESEL ENGINES

If the outside temperature is very low,the diesel thickens due to the formationof paraffin clots and could clog the dieselfilter.

In order to avoid these problems, differ-ent types of diesel are distributed ac-cording to the season: summer type,winter type and arctic type (cold, moun-tainous areas).

If refuelling with diesel fuel whose speci-fications are not suitable for the currenttemperature, it is advisable to mixTUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the pro-portions shown on the container with thefuel. Pour the additive into the tank beforethe diesel fuel.

When using or parking the vehicle for along time in the mountains or cold areas,it is advisable to refuel using locally avail-able diesel fuel.

In this case, it is also advisable to keep thetank over 50% full.

For diesel engines, use onlydiesel fuel for motor vehiclesin accordance with EN590European specifications. The

use of other products or mixtures maydamage the engine beyond repair andconsequently invalidate the warranty,due to the damage caused. If you ac-cidentally refuel with another type offuel, do not start the engine, and drainthe fuel tank. If the engine has run,even for a very short time, you willneed to have the entire fuel systememptied in addition to the tank.

REFUELLING CAPACITY

To fill the tank completely, top-up twiceafter the first click of the fuel delivery gun.Further top-ups could cause failures in thefuel supply system.


102

SAFE

TYST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

FUEL FILLER CAP – fig. 103

To refuel, if your car has central locking,unlock the doors, open the flap A and un-screw the cap B; the cap is fitted with aspecial device C which fastens it to the flapso that it cannot be mislaid.

If your car does not have a central lock-ing, operate lever A-fig. 104 to releasethe flap.

In some versions, the cap B may be pro-vided with a lock and key; use the igni-tion key to access the flap A-fig. 100,turn it counterclockwise and unscrew thecap itself.

The sealing may cause a slight pressure in-crease in the tank. A little breathing off,while slackening the cap is absolutely nor-mal.

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The following devices are used for reduc-ing petrol fuel engine emissions:

❒ three-way catalytic converter;

❒ oxygen sensors;

❒ evaporation control system.

In addition, do not let the engine run, evenfor a test, with one or more spark plugsdisconnected.

The following devices are used for reduc-ing diesel fuel engine emissions:

❒ oxidising catalytic converter;

❒ exhaust gas recirculation system (EGR).

fig. 103 F0M0203m

Do not bring naked flamesor lit cigarettes near to the

fuel tank opening: fire risk. Keep yourface away from the fuel filler to pre-vent breathing in harmful vapours.

WARNING

fig. 104 F0R0210m

When refuelling, hook the cap onto thedevice inside the lid as shown in fig. 103.

Under normal operating con-ditions, the catalytic con-

verter becomes very hot. Do not parkthe car on grass, dry leaves, pine nee-dles or other flammable material: firehazard.

WARNING


103

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

SEAT BELTS ........................................................................... 104

S.B.R. SYSTEM ....................................................................... 105

PRETENSIONERS ................................................................ 106

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY ..................................... 109

PROVISION FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEAT ASSEMBLY ... 114

FRONT AIR BAGS .............................................................. 116

SIDE BAGS ............................................................................. 118

SSAAFFEETTYY

103-120 LINEA EUROPA 1ed GB_103-120 LINEA 2ed it 25/06/13 16.41 Pagina 103

104

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

The rear seat belts must be used as shownin the diagram in fig. 2.

SEAT BELTS

USING THE SEAT BELTS fig. 1

The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.

To fasten the seat belts, hold the tongueA and insert it into the buckle B, until thelocking click is heard.

On removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again with-out jerking.

To unfasten seat belts, press button C.Guide the belt while it is rewinding to pre-vent it from twisting.

Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.

fig. 1 F0R0150m fig. 2 F0R0088m

Never press button C-fig. 1when travelling.

WARNINGThe reel may lock up when the car isparked on a steep slope: this is perfectlynormal. Furthermore, the reel mechanismlocks the belt if it is pulled sharply or inthe event of sudden braking, collisions andhigh-speed bends.

The rear seat is fitted with inertia seatbelts with three anchor points and a reel.


ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT

Always adjust the height of the seat beltto fit the person wearing it: this precau-tion can dramatically reduce the risk of in-jury in case of collision.

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes approximately half way be-tween the shoulder and the neck.

To adjust, move the grip A-fig. 3 of thelocking mechanism either up or down andat the same time move the swinging ring B-fig. 3 to the most suitable of the allowedpositions.

IMPORTANT Make sure the front seatbackrest clicks into place when returningit to the position of standard use afterfolding it.

S.B.R. SYSTEM

The car is fitted with the SBR system (SeatBelt Reminder), consisting of a warningsound which, together with the warninglight < lighting up on the instrument panel,alerts the driver and front passenger thattheir seat belt is not fastened.

The buzzer can be deactivated (until thenext time the engine stops) as follows:

❒ fasten the driver’s and front passenger’sseat belts;

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR;

❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then re-lease one of the seat belts.

For permanent deactivation, contact a FiatDealership.

With digital display, the S.B.R. system canonly be reset at a Fiat Dealership.

105

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

Remember that after a vio-lent impact, front-seat pas-

sengers who are not wearing theirseat belts not only expose themselvesto significant risk for injury, but alsorepresent a danger to passengers oc-cupying the rear seats.

WARNING

Make sure the backrest isproperly secured at both

sides to prevent it moving forward inthe event of sharp braking that maycause injuries to passengers.

WARNING

fig. 3

A

B

F0R0151m


PRETENSIONERS

To increase the efficiency of the seat belts,the car is fitted with front pretensioners.These devices, in the event of a violentcrash, rewind the seat belts by a few cen-timetres. In this way, they ensure that theseat belt adheres perfectly to the wearerbefore the restraining action begins.

The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-vice has intervened; the seat belt cannotbe drawn back up even when guiding itmanually.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-gree of protection from the action of thepretensioner, wear the seat belt keepingit tight to the chest and pelvis.

A slight amount of smoke may be detectedduring operation of the pretensioners.This smoke is not harmful and does notindicate a fire.

LOAD LIMITERS

To increase passenger safety, the frontseat belt reels contain a load limiter whichcontrols the force acting on the chest andshoulders during the belt restraining ac-tion in the event of a head-on collision.

106

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

The pretensioner may beused only once. After it is

triggered, have it replaced at a FiatDealership.

WARNING

Operations which lead toknocks, vibrations or localisedheating (over 100°C for a max-imum of 6 hours) in the area

around the pretensioner may causedamage or trigger it. Contact a FiatDealership for any assistance.

The pretensioner does not require anymaintenance or lubrication.

Anything that modifies its original condi-tions invalidates its efficiency.

If, due to unusual natural events (floods, seastorms, etc.), the device has been affectedby water and mud, it must be replaced.


GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE SEAT BELTS

The driver must comply with (and have allcar passengers follow) any local regula-tions in force concerning the use of seatbelts. Always fasten the seat belts beforestarting.

Seat belts must also be worn by expectantmothers: the risk of injury in the event ofan accident is greatly reduced for themand the unborn child if they are wearinga seat belt. Expectant mothers must po-sition the lower part of the belt very lowdown so that it passes under the pelvis andabdomen (see fig. 4).

IMPORTANT The belt must not be twisted.The upper part must pass over the shoul-der and cross the chest diagonally. Thelower part must adhere to the pelvis (asshown in fig. 5) rather than the abdomenof the passenger. Never use devices (clips,pegs, etc.) to hold the seat belt away fromyour body.

IMPORTANT Each belt shall be used byone person only: never travel with a childsitting on the passenger’s lap with a sin-gle belt to protect them both (fig. 6). Donot fasten any other object to the body.

107

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY


For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat upright,

lean back into it and make sure theseat belt fits closely across your chestand pelvis. Always fasten the seat beltson both the front and the rear seats!Travelling without seat belts will in-crease the risk of severe injury and evendeath in the event of an accident.

WARNING


SEAT BELTS MAINTENANCE

For keeping the seat belts in efficient con-ditions, observe the following:

❒ always use the belts with the strap wellstretched and never twisted; makesure that it is free to run without im-pediments;

❒ after a serious accident, replace the belteven if it does not appear damaged. Al-ways replace the belt if the preten-sioners were deployed;

❒ to clean the belts, wash by hand withwater and mild soap, rinse and leaveto dry in the shade. Never use strongdetergents, bleach, paints or any othersubstance which could damage the beltfibres;

108

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

Removing or otherwise tam-pering with safety belt and

pretensioner components is strictlyprohibited. Any operations on thesecomponents must be performed byqualified and authorised technicians.Always go to a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

If the belt has been sharplypulled, for example as the

result of an accident, the safety belt,together with the anchoring devices,the anchoring device mounting screwsand the pretensioner must be com-pletely replaced. Even if the belt doesnot present any exterior signs of wearor damage, it may have lost its re-straining properties.

WARNING

❒ prevent the reels from getting wet:their correct operation is only guaran-teed if water does not get inside;

❒ replace the seat belt when it showssigns of significant wear or cuts.


For optimal protection in the event of acollision, all passengers must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems.

This is even more important for children.

This prescription is compulsory in all EUcountries pursuant to Directive 2003/20/EC.

A child’s head is larger and heavier than anadult’s in proportion to its body, while itsmuscular and bone structures are not fullydeveloped. Therefore, correct restraintsystems are necessary which are differentfrom adult seat belts.

The results of research in relation to thebest protection for children is summarisedin European Regulation EEC-R44, which di-vides the restraint systems into five groupsin addition to making their use compulsory:

Group 0 up to 10 kg in weight

Group 0+ up to 13 kg in weight

Group 1 9-18 kg in weight

Group 2 15-25 kg in weight

Group 3 22-36 kg of weight

As you can see, the groups overlap partlyand, in fact, there are devices on sale thatcover more than one weight group.

All child restraint devices must bear thecertification data, together with the con-trol mark, on a label solidly fixed to theseat which must never be removed.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children areconsidered as adults and wear the seatbelts normally.

Lineaccessori Fiat offers child restraint sys-tems for each weight group. These devicesare recommended, having been specificallydesigned and tested for Fiat cars.

109

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

CARRYING CHILDRENSAFELY Do not place a cradle seat

facing backwards on thefront seat if the passenger side air bagis on. Deployment of the air bag inan accident could cause fatal injuriesto the baby regardless of the severityof the collision. It is advisable to al-ways carry children in dedicated childseats on the rear seat, which is themost protected position in the eventof an accident.

WARNING

SERIOUS DANGER Should itbe absolutely necessary tocarry a child on the front seatin a backwards-facing childseat, the passenger’s frontand side air bags must be de-

activated through the setup menu. De-activation can be verified by checkingthe F warning light on the instru-ment panel. The passenger seat mustalso be slid back as far as possible inorder to avoid the child seat from com-ing into contact with the dashboard.

WARNING


110

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

GROUP 0 and 0+Babies up to 13 kg must be carried fac-ing backwards on a cradle seat, which,supporting the head, does not inducestress on the neck in the event of sharpdecelerations.The cradle is held in place by the car seatbelts fig. 7 and in turn it must restrain thechild with its own belts.

fig. 7 F0R0092m fig. 8 F0R0133m

GROUP 1

From 9 to 18 kg, children may be carriedfacing forward, as shown in fig. 8.

The figures are only exam-ples for fitting purposes. In-

stall the car seat according to theinstructions, which are compulsorilylinked to this type of restraint system.Child seats with Isofix attachmentsare available for safe anchoring to theseat without using the car seat belts.

WARNING


111

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

fig. 9 F0R0094m

GROUP 2

Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the carseat belts directly, see fig. 9. The child seatis needed only to position the child cor-rectly with respect to the belts so that thediagonal section crosses the child’s chestand never the neck, and the lower part issnug on the pelvis not the abdomen.

GROUP 3

For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the sizeof the child’s chest no longer requires asupport to space the child’s back from thebackrest.

Fig. 10 shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.

Children over 1.50 m in height can wearseat belts like adults.

fig. 10 F0R0095m

The figures are only exam-ples for fitting purposes. In-

stall the car seat according to theinstructions, which are compulsorilyincluded with this type of restraintsystem.

WARNING


SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR CHILD SEAT USE

The car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for child seats on thevarious seats of the car as shown in the following table:

112

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY Passenger: Passenger: Passenger

Group Weight range front rear rearcentre

Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U U (*)

Group 1 9-18 kg U U (*)

Group 2 15-25 kg U U (*)

Group 3 22-36 kg U U (*)

Key:

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.

(*) Never put any type of child seat on the central rear seat.


Below is a summary of the safetyrules to be followed when carrying children:

1) The recommended position for in-stalling child seats is on the rear seat, asit is the most protected area in the eventof a crash.

2) If the passenger air bag is deactivatedalways check that the warning light F islit on the instrument panel to make surethat it has actually been deactivated.

3) Carefully follow the instructions sup-plied with the child seat which are manda-tory by law. Keep the instructions in thecar along with the other documents andthis handbook. Do not use second-handchild seats without instructions.

4) Always check the seat belt is well fas-tened by pulling on it.

5) Only one child is to be strapped intoeach retaining system; never carry twochildren using one child seat.

6) Always check that the seat belts donot restrain the child’s throat.

7) While travelling, do not let the childsit incorrectly or release the belts.

8) Never carry children on your lap, evennewborns. No-one, however strong, canrestrain a child in the event of an accident.

9) In the event of an accident, replace thechild seat with a new one.

113

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

Do not place a cradle seatfacing backwards on the

front seat if the passenger side air bagis on. Deployment of the air bag in anaccident could cause fatal injuries tothe baby regardless of the severity ofthe collision. It is advisable to alwayscarry children in a child seat on therear seat, which is the most protectedposition in the event of a collision.

WARNING


ASSEMBLY SETUP FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEAT

The car can be fitted with a Universal Isofixchild seat, a new European standardisedsystem for carrying children safely.

Isofix systems can be fitted alongside a tra-ditional child seat.

An example of child seat is shown in Fig. 11.

The Universal Isofix child seat coversweight group 1.

The other weight groups are covered bythe specific Isofix child seat, which can beused only if specifically designed, testedand approved for this car (see car list pro-vided with the child seat).

Due to its different anchoring system, thechild seat must be anchored to the speciallower metal rings A-fig. 12, set betweenrear backrest and cushion. The upper belt(provided with the child seat) must thenbe secured to ring B-fig. 13 set behindthe side rear head restraint, at the childseat level.

Remember that in the case of UniversalIsofix child seats, you can use all seats ap-proved with the marking ECE R44/03“Universal Isofix”.

114

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

fig. 12 F0R0097m

fig. 11 F0R0096m fig. 13 F0R0098m

Fit the child seat only whenthe car is stationary. The

child seat is correctly anchored to thebrackets when you hear the click. Fol-low the instructions for assembly, dis-assembly and positioning that themanufacturer must supply with thechild seat.

WARNINGThe Lineaccessori Fiat includes the Uni-versal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat and thespecific “G 0/1” seat.

For any further installation/usage details,refer to the “Instruction Manual” providedwith the child seat.


115

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

E

E

D

C (*)

D

C (*)

B

B1

A

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IUF

IUF

IUF

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

PASSENGER SEAT SUITABILITY FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

The table below, according to European Directive ECE 16, shows the different installation possibilities for Isofix restraint systemson seats fitted with Isofix attachments.

Weight group Child seat Class of Rear side position Isofix size Isofix position

Group 0 up to 10 kg

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group I from 9 up to 18 kg

IUF: suitable for forward-facing Isofix child restraint systems, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), approved for the weightgroup.

IL: suitable for specific Isofix-type child restraint systems approved for this type of car. The seat can be installed by moving the frontseat forward.

(*) In case of height-adjustable front seat, lift it completely.


116

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

The air bags are not deployed in the eventof minor collisions (for which the re-straining action of the seat belts is suffi-cient). For this reason, the seat belt mustbe worn at all times. In the case of side-on collisions, the seat belts hold occupantsin the correct position and prevent themfrom being thrown out of the car by a veryviolent collision.

Do not apply stickers orother objects to the steering

wheel, to the passenger’s side air bagcover or on the roof side lining. Donot place objects (e.g. mobile phones)on the passenger side dashboard be-cause these could interfere with thecorrect opening of the air bag andcause severe injury to occupants.

WARNINGThe volume of front air bags at max. in-flation fills most of the space between thesteering wheel and the driver and between the dashboard and the passenger.

In the event of an impact, someone notwearing a seat belt could move forwardand come into contact with a bag which isstill in the opening phase. The protectionoffered by the bag is compromised inthese circumstances.

Front air bags may not activate in the fol-lowing situations:

❒ in collisions against highly deformableobjects that do not affect the front sur-face of the car (e.g. bumper collisionagainst guard rail, piles of gravel etc.);

❒ jamming of the car underneath othervehicles or protective barriers (e.g. un-derneath a truck or a guard rail); in thiscase, the bags would offer no additionalprotection with respect to the seat beltand their deployment is unnecessary.Lack of deployment in such cases isconsequently not the sign of a fault.

FRONT AIR BAGS

The car is provided with front air bags forthe driver and the passenger.

The front driver/passenger air bags havebeen designed to protect the occupants inthe event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion be-tween the occupant and the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Therefore non-activation in other types ofcollisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.

An electronic control unit will make thebag inflate in the event of a frontal impact.The bag will inflate instantaneously placingitself between the front occupants bodyand the structures which could cause in-jury. It will deflate immediately afterwards.

Driver and passenger front air bags arenot a replacement of but complementaryto the belts, which you are recommendedto always wear, as specified by law in Eu-rope and most non-European countries.


PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAGfig. 15

This consists of an instantly inflating bagcontained in a special recess in the dash-board: this bag has a larger volume thanthat of the driver’s.

MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG AND SIDE BAG FOR CHEST PROTECTION (for versions/markets where provided)

Whenever a child needs to be carried onthe front seat, the passenger’s front air bagand side bag (for versions/markets whereprovided) must be deactivated.

The instrument panel warning light Fwillstay on constantly until the passenger’sfront air bag and side bag are reactivated(for versions/markets where provided).

117

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

fig. 14 F0R0099m

fig. 15 F0R0100m

SERIOUS DANGER: Do notput cradle child seats facingbackwards on the front seatif the passenger’s air bag isenabled (ON). Deploymentof the airbag in an accident

could cause fatal injuries to the child.Always deactivate the passenger airbag when placing a child seat on thefront seat. The passenger seat mustalso be slid back as far as possible inorder to avoid the child seat fromcoming into contact with the dash-board. Although this is not mandatoryby law, the air bag should be imme-diately reactivated when children areno longer carried to ensure betterprotection to adults.

WARNING

To manually deactivate thepassenger’s front and side

air bags (for versions/markets whereprovided), refer to paragraphs “Dig-ital display” and “Multifunction dis-play” in the chapter “Dashboard andcontrols”.

WARNING

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 14

This consists of an instantly inflating cush-ion contained in a special recess in thecentre of the steering wheel.


SIDE BAGS (for versions/markets where provided)

The car is fitted with front side air bags for driver and passenger (for versions/markets where provided) for protectingthe chest and pelvis, and window bags (forversions/markets where provided) forprotecting the heads of front and rearpassengers.

Side air bags (for versions/markets whereprovided) protect car occupants fromside-on crashes of medium/high severityby placing the bag between the occupantand the internal parts of the side structureof the car.

Non-activation of side bags in othertypes of collisions (front collisions, rearshunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not a systemmalfunction.

In the event of a side-on crash, an elec-tronic control unit triggers the inflation ofthe bag if required. The cushion immedi-ately inflates, placing itself between the oc-cupant’s body and structures that couldcause injuries; the cushion deflates imme-diately afterwards.

Side bags (for versions/markets whereprovided) are not a replacement of butcomplementary to the belts, which youare recommended to always wear, asspecified by law in Europe and most non-European countries.

FRONT SIDE BAGS – CHEST AND PELVIS AREA fig. 16(for versions/markets where provided)

Front side air bags are housed in the seatbackrests. They consist of an instantly in-flating bag designed to increase protectionof the occupants’ chest and pelvis area inthe event of a side-on crash of medium/high severity.

SIDE WINDOW BAGS – HEAD PROTECTION – fig. 17 (for versions/markets where provided)

This is formed by two “curtain” windowbags located behind the side roof coverand are covered by special trim. They aredesigned to protect the head of front andrear passengers in the event of side colli-sions, thanks to the wide cushion inflationsurface.

IMPORTANT In the event of side impact,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem by maintaining a correct position onthe seat, thus allowing the bags to unfoldcorrectly.

118

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

fig. 16 F0R0153m fig. 17 F0R0102m


IMPORTANT The front air bags and/orside bags may be deployed if the car is sub-ject to heavy knocks or accidents involv-ing the underbody area, such as violentshocks against steps, kerbs or low obsta-cles, the car falling into big holes or hol-lows in the road.

IMPORTANT A small amount of dust willbe released when the air bags are de-ployed. The dust is harmless and does notindicate the beginning of a fire. Further-more, the surface of the deployed bag andthe interior of the car may be coveredwith dusty residue. This dust can irritateskin and eyes. Wash with mild soap andwater in the event of exposure.

IMPORTANT Should an accident occur inwhich any of the safety devices is activated,take the car to a Fiat Dealership to havethe activated devices replaced and to havethe system checked.

Every control, repair and replacement op-eration concerning the air bags must onlybe carried out at a Fiat Dealership.

In the case of car scrapping, have the airbag system deactivated at a Fiat Dealer-ship first. If the car changes ownership, thenew owner must be informed of themethod of use of air bags and the abovewarnings and also be given this “OwnerHandbook”.

IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front airbags and front side bags are deployed ac-cording to different logics on the basis ofthe type of collision. Failure to deploy ofone of the devices does not necessarily in-dicate a system malfunction.

119

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

Never rest your head, armsor elbows on the doors, on

the windows or in the window bagarea as this could cause injuries dur-ing the inflation phase.

WARNING

Never lean your head, armsor elbows out of the window.

WARNING

GENERAL WARNINGS

If when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬

does not turn on or if it stays on whentravelling (together with the messageon the multifunction display, for ver-sions/markets where provided), therecould be a failure in the safety sys-tems; in this event, air bags or pre-tensioners may not trigger in the caseof impact or, in a lower number ofcases, they could be triggered acci-dentally. Contact a Fiat Dealershipimmediately to have the systemchecked.

WARNING

Do not cover the backrest offront and rear seats with

trims or covers that are not suitableto be used with side bags.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onyour lap, in front of your

chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips; serious injury may re-sult in the event of the air bag beingtriggered.

WARNING


120

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSA

FETY

Always drive keeping yourhands on the steering wheel

rim so that the air bag can inflatefreely if necessary. Do not drive withyour body bent forward. Keep yourback straight against the backrest.

WARNING

Air bags may be deployed ifanother vehicle crashes into

the car, if the key is inserted and atMAR even if the engine is not runningand the car is stationary. For this rea-son, children must never occupy thefront seat, even if the car is not mov-ing. Conversely, remember that whenthe key is inserted in the STOP posi-tion, no safety device (air bag or pre-tensioners) will activate following animpact; non-activation of these de-vices in such cases cannot thereforebe considered an indicator of systemmalfunction.

WARNING

Do not wash the seats withwater or pressurised vapour

(hand washing or automatic seatwashing stations).

WARNING

The front air bag is triggeredin the case of stronger

shocks with respect to that of pre-tensioners. For impacts whose inten-sity falls between the two levels,normally, only the pretensioners willbe activated.

WARNING

Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the

support handles.

WARNING

The air bag does not replaceseat belts but increases their

efficiency. Additionally, because frontair bags are not deployed for low-speed crashes, side collisions, rear andcollisions or rollovers, in these cases,vehicle passengers are protected onlyby their safety belts, which must al-ways be fastened.

WARNING

When the ignition key isturned to MAR, the warning

light F (with passenger’s front airbag activated) turns on and flashesfor a few seconds to remind you thatthe passenger’s air bag will be de-ployed in a crash, after which itshould go off.

WARNING

If the vehicle has been subjectto theft or a theft attempt, or

if it has been affected by vandalism orflooding, have the air bag systemchecked at a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING


121

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................. 122

PARKING ............................................................................... 125

USING THE MANUAL GEARBOX ................................. 126

FUEL SAVING ....................................................................... 127

TOWING TRAILERS .......................................................... 128

SNOW TYRES ...................................................................... 131

SNOW CHAINS .................................................................. 131

STORING THE CAR ........................................................... 132

SSTTAARRTTIINNGG UUPP AANNDD DDRRIIVVIINNGG


122

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

STARTING THE ENGINE

The car is fitted with an electronic enginelock device: if the engine fails to start, seethe paragraph on “The Fiat CODE system”in the “Dashboard and controls” section.

The engine may be noisier during the firstfew seconds of operation, especially aftera long period of inactivity. This is a featureof hydraulic tappets, the timing systemchosen to reduce the number of servicinginterventions, and affects neither func-tionality nor reliability.

In the first period of use, werecommend to not requestingmaximum performance fromthe car (for instance excessive

accelerations, extended travel at max-imum speed, sudden braking etc.).

With engine off, do not leavethe key in the ignition switchto prevent needlessly drainingthe battery.

It is dangerous to run the en-gine in enclosed areas. The

engine takes in oxygen and releasescarbon dioxide, carbon monoxideand other toxic gases.

WARNING

Remember that the brakeservo and power steering are

not operational until the engine hasbeen started, therefore you need toapply much more force than usual tothe brake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING

PROCEDURE FOR PETROL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ engage the handbrake;

❒ put the gear lever into neutral;

❒ press the clutch pedal all the way downwithout touching the accelerator;

❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and letit go as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at the firstattempt, return the ignition key toSTOP before repeating the attempt tostart the engine.


123

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

If, with the key at MAR the instrumentpanel warning light Y stays on withwarning light U, it is advisable to turn thekey back to STOP and then back toMAR; if the warning light stays on, trywith the other keys provided.

IMPORTANT If the instrument panelwarning light Y stays on constantly,contact a Fiat Dealership immediately.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyat MAR when the engine is off.

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIESEL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ engage the handbrake;

❒ put the gear lever into neutral;

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR: thewarning lights m and Y on the in-strument panel will turn on;

❒ wait for the warning lights Y and mto turn off. The hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen;

❒ press the clutch pedal all the way downwithout touching the accelerator;

❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soonas the warning light m turns off. Wait-ing too long will waste the work doneby the glow plugs. Release the key assoon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If, when the ignition key is at MAR, theinstrument panel warning light Y re-mains lit together with warning light m,turn the key to STOP and then back toMAR; if the warning lights remain on, tryusing the other keys provided with thecar.

IMPORTANT If the instrument panelwarning light Y stays on constantly,contact a Fiat Dealership immediately.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyat MAR when the engine is off.

Warning light m will flash for60 seconds after starting orduring prolonged cranking toindicate a fault to the glow

plug heating system. Use the car asnormal if the engine starts, but go toa Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.


124

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

STOPPING THE ENGINE

Turn the ignition key to STOP while theengine is idling.

IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, youshould allow the engine to “catch itsbreath” before turning it off by letting itidle, to allow the temperature in the en-gine compartment to fall.

Punching the gas pedal be-fore turning off the engine isto be avoided: it unnecessar-ily wastes fuel and may dam-

age turbo compressor engines.

WARMING UP THE ENGINEAFTER IT HAS JUST STARTED(petrol and diesel versions)

Proceed as follows:

❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turnat medium speed. Do not accelerateabruptly;

❒ do not demand maximum performancefor the first few kilometres. Wait untilthe engine coolant gauge starts moving.

Remember that the brakeservo and power steering arenot operational until the en-gine has been started, so you

need to apply much more force thanusual to the brake pedal and steer-ing wheel.

Never bump start the engineby pushing, towing or coastingdownhill. This could cause fuelto flow into the catalytic con-

verter and damage it beyond repair.


125

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

HANDBRAKE fig. 1

The handbrake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.

To use the handbrake pull the lever up-wards until the car cannot be moved. Fouror five clicks are generally enough whenthe car is on level ground while nine orten may be required if the car is on a steepslope and laden.

IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-tact a Fiat Dealership to have the hand-brake adjusted.

When the handbrake lever is pulled up andthe ignition key is at MAR, the instrumentpanel warning light x will turn on.

PARKING

Proceed as follows:

❒ Stop the engine and engage the hand-brake;

❒ Engage a gear (on a slope, engage firstgear if the vehicle is facing uphill or re-verse if it is facing downhill) and leavethe wheels steered.

If the car is parked on a steep slope, it isalso advisable to block the wheels with awedge or stone. Do not leave the key inthe ignition switch at MAR to preventdraining the battery. Always remove thekey when leaving the car.

Never leave children unat-tended in the car. Always re-

move the ignition key when leavingthe car and take it with you.

WARNING

fig. 1 F0R0103m

To release the handbrake, proceed asfollows:

❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press therelease button A;

❒ keep button A pressed and lower thelever. The warning light x on the in-strument panel will turn off.

Press the brake pedal when carrying outthis operation to prevent the car frommoving accidentally.


126

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

USING THE MANUALGEARBOX

To engage the gears, press the clutch pedalfully and shift the gear lever into the re-quired position (the diagram is shown onthe knob fig. 2-3-4).

IMPORTANT The car can only be put intoreverse gear when it has stopped movingcompletely. With the engine running, waitfor at least 2 seconds with the clutch pedalfully pressed before engaging reverse toprevent damage to the gears and grating.

For version 1.4: to engage reverse R fromneutral position, lift the sliding ring A un-der the knob and shift the lever to the rightand then back fig. 2.

For version 1.3 MultiJet and 1.4 T-JET ver-sions: to engage reverse R from neutralposition, shift the lever to the right andthen back fig. 3.

For version 1.6 Multijet: to engage reverseR from neutral position, lift the sliding ringA under the knob and shift the lever to theleft and then forward fig. 4.

fig. 2 – 1.4 version F0R0154m

Press the clutch pedal fullyto change gears correctly. It

is therefore essential that there isnothing under the pedals: make surethe mats are lying flat and do not getin the way of the pedals.

WARNING

Do not drive with your handresting on the gear lever asthe force exerted, even ifslight, could lead over time to

premature wear of the gearbox inter-nal components.

fig. 3 – 1.3 Multijet – 1.4 T-JET versions

F0R0105m

IMPORTANT The clutch pedal should beused only to change gear. Do not drivewith your foot resting on the clutch pedal,however lightly. For versions/marketswhere provided, the electronic clutch con-trol could cut in, interpreting the incor-rect driving style as a fault.

fig. 4 – 1.6 Multijet version F0R0169m


127

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Roof rack/ski rack

Remove the roof rack or the ski rack fromthe roof after use. These accessorieslower aerodynamic penetration and ad-versely affect consumption levels. Whentransporting particularly large objects, usea trailer if possible.

Electrical devices

Use electrical devices only for the amountof time needed. Rear heated window, ad-ditional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the require-ment of current increases fuel consump-tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).

Climate control system

The climate control system is an additionalload which greatly affects the engine lead-ing to higher consumption (on average upto +20%). When the temperature outsidethe car permits it, use the air vents wherepossible.

Devices for aerodynamic control

The use of non-certified devices for aero-dynamic control may adversely affect airdrag and consumption levels.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm up the engine at low or highrevs when the car is stationary; this causesthe engine to warm up more slowly,thereby increasing fuel consumption andemissions. It is therefore advisable tomove off immediately, slowly, avoidinghigh speeds: in this way the engine willwarm up more quickly.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid accelerating when stopped at traf-fic lights or before switching off the engine.The latter action, like double-clutching, isunnecessary and causes increase of con-sumption and pollution.

Gear selection

As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear. Using a lowgear for faster acceleration will increaseconsumption.

In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions andengine wear.

FUEL SAVING

Here are some useful tips to save fuel andminimise harmful emissions of CO2 andother pollutants (nitric oxides, unburnt hy-drocarbons, fine dusts etc…).

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Car maintenance

Have checks and adjustments carried outin accordance with the “Scheduled Ser-vicing Plan”.

Tyres

Check the pressure of the tyres routinelyat an interval of no more than 4 weeks: ifthe pressure is too low, consumption lev-els increase as resistance to rolling ishigher.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with an overloaded boot.The weight of the car (especially when dri-ving in town) and its ride greatly affectsconsumption and stability.


128

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Short journeys and frequent cold starts willprevent the engine from reaching optimalrunning temperature. Consequently, bothconsumption (from +15 to +30% on urbancycle ) and emissions will increase.

Traffic and road conditions

Rather high consumption levels are linkedto situations with heavy traffic, for instancewhen travelling in queues with frequentuse of the lower gears or in cities withmany traffic lights. Winding mountainroads and rough road surfaces also ad-versely affect consumption.

Stops in traffic

During prolonged hold-ups (e.g. level cross-ings) the engine should be switched off.

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANT NOTES

For towing caravans or trailers the carmust be fitted with a certified tow hookand an adequate electrical system. Instal-lation should be carried out by specialisedpersonnel who will issue the required pa-pers for travelling on roads.

Install any specific and/or additional rearview mirrors as specified by the HighwayCode.

Remember that when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-ing spaces increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight.

Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.

The weight the trailer exerts on the cartow hook reduces the car’s loading ca-pacity by the same amount. Consider theweight of the trailer fully laden, includingaccessories and luggage, to make sure youdo not exceed the maximum towableweight (shown on the vehicle registrationdocument).

Top speed

Fuel consumption considerably increaseswith speed. Maintain a constant speed,avoiding unnecessary braking and acceler-ation, which cost in terms of both fuel andemissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently severely affects con-sumption and emissions: accelerationshould be gradual and should not exceedthe maximum torque.


129

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK

The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel accord-ing to any additional and/or integrative in-formation supplied by the Manufacturer ofthe device.

The towing device must meet current reg-ulations with reference to Directive 94/20/EEC and subsequent amendments.

For any version the towing device usedmust be right for the towable weight ofthe car on which it is to be installed.

For the electrical connection a standardconnector should be used which is gen-erally placed on a special bracket normallyfastened to the towing device, and a spe-cial ECU for external trailer light controlmust be installed on the car.

7 or 13-pin 12 V DC connections shouldbe used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Stan-dards). Follow any instructions providedby the car manufacturer and/or the tow-ing device manufacturer.

An electric brake or winch should bepowered directly by the battery througha cable with a cross-section of no lessthan 2.5 mm2.

IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de-vices must be used with running engine.

In addition to the electrical branches, thecar electrical system can only be con-nected to the supply cable for an electricbrake and to the cable for an internal lightfor the trailer, not exceeding 15 W.

For connections use the preset control unitwith battery cable no less than 2.5 mm2.

Respect the speed limits specific to eachcountry for vehicles towing trailers. Inany case, the top speed must not exceed100 km/h.

You should fit a suitable stabiliser to thetrailer drawbar.

The ABS with which the carmay be equipped will not

control the braking system of thetrailer. Particular caution is requiredon slippery roads.

WARNING

Do not, under any circum-stances, modify the vehicle’s

braking system to control the trailerbreaking system. The trailer brakingsystem must be fully independentfrom the hydraulic system of the car.

WARNING


130

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Assembly diagram fig. 5

The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by Ø using a total of6 M8 screws and 2 M10 screws.

The internal back plates should be at least6 mm thick.

The hook should be fastened to the bodyavoiding any type of drilling and trimmingof the rear bumper that remains visiblewhen the hook is removed.

IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten alabel (plainly visible) of suitable size and ma-terial with the following wording:

MAX LOAD ON BALL 70 kg

After fitting, screw holes mustbe sealed to prevent a ex-

haust gas inlet.

WARNING

fig. 5 F0R0190m

Existing hole

Exist

ing

scre

w

Lade

n

Exist

ing

scre

wEx

istin

g sc

rew

Existing screw

Existing screw

Existing hole

Standard ball


131

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IMPORTANT When using snow tyreswith a maximum speed index below theone that can be reached by the car (in-creased by 5%), place a notice in the pas-senger compartment, plainly in view,which states the maximum speed allowedby the snow tyres (as per EC Directive).

All four tyres should be the same (brandand profile) to ensure greater safety whendriving and braking as well as making thecar more responsive.

Remember that you should not change therotation direction of the tyres.

SNOW CHAINS

The use of snow chains should be in com-pliance with local regulations.

The snow chains may be applied onlyonto the front wheel tyres (drive wheels).Use of Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains isrecommended.

Check the tension of the snow chains af-ter the first few metres have been driven.

IMPORTANT With snow chains, use theaccelerator with extreme care to prevent,or to limit as much as possible, slipping ofthe driving wheels that could cause chainbreakage resulting in damage to the carbody or mechanical components.

IMPORTANT Use compact 9 mm snowchains.

SNOW TYRES

Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.

Fiat Dealerships will be happy to provideadvice concerning the most suitable typeof tyres for the customer’s requirements.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snowtyres, follow the instructions given in para-graph “Wheels” in the section “Techni-cal specifications”.

The performance of these tyres is consid-erably reduced when the tread depth isless than 4 mm. Replace them in this case.

Due to snow tyre characteristics, undernormal conditions of use or on long mo-torway journeys, the performance ofthese tyres is lower than that of standardtyres. Limit performance according to theuse for which they were certified.

The maximum speed forsnow tyres marked “Q” is

160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T”tyres and 210 km/h for “H” tyres. Youshould, however, always comply withthe speed limits of the highway code.

WARNING


132

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

STORING THE CAR

If the car is to be left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be followed:

❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos-sible well-ventilated premises;

❒ engage a gear;

❒ check that the handbrake is not en-gaged;

❒ disconnect the negative battery termi-nal and check the charge (see “Batterycharge conditions” in the “Servicing andmaintenance” chapter). Repeat thischeck once every three months duringstorage. Recharge the battery if required(see paragraph “Battery recharging” inthe chapter “In an emergency”).

❒ clean and protect the painted parts us-ing protective wax;

❒ clean and protect the shiny metal partsusing special commercially availablecompounds;

❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubberwindscreen and rear window wiperblades and lift them off the glass;

❒ slightly open the windows;

❒ cover the car with a cloth or perforatedplastic sheet. Do not use sheets of non-perforated plastic as they do not allowmoisture on the car body to evaporate;

❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the stan-dard specified pressure and check it atintervals;

❒ if you do not disconnect the batteryfrom the electric system, check itscharge every thirty days (see paragraph“Battery charge conditions”, in thechapter “Servicing and maintenance”);

❒ Recharge the battery if required (seeparagraph “Battery recharging” in thechapter “In an emergency”).

❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.

IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch offthe car alarm with the remote control.

Keep your speed down whensnow chains are fitted. Donot exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and kerbsand also avoid driving forlong distances on roads not

covered with snow to prevent dam-aging the car and the roadbed.

WARNING

205/45 R17 88V tyres cannotbe fitted with snow chains.

WARNING


133

SAFE

TYIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

GENERAL WARNINGS ..................................................... 134

LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL .............................................. 134

HANDBRAKE APPLIED ..................................................... 134

AIR BAG FAILURE ............................................................... 135

OVERHEATED ENGINE COOLANT ............................ 135

LOW BATTERY CHARGE ................................................ 136

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ........................................ 136

ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED ........................................ 136

INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING .................................. 137

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED ......................................... 137

EBD FAILURE ........................................................................ 137

INJECTION/EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE ........................... 138

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATED ........ 138

ABS FAILURE ........................................................................ 139

FUEL RESERVE ...................................................................... 139

GLOW PLUG HEATING ................................................... 139

GLOW PLUG HEATING FAILURE ................................. 139

WATER IN DIESEL FILTER ............................................... 140

CAR PROTECTION SYSTEM FAULT – FIAT CODE .... 140

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAULT .............................................. 140

REAR FOG LIGHTS ............................................................ 140

GENERIC WARNING ........................................................ 141

ESP SYSTEM FAULT ............................................................ 142

WORN BRAKE PADS ........................................................ 142

PARKING SENSOR FAILURE ........................................... 142

SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS ...... 143

FOLLOW ME HOME .......................................................... 143

FOG LIGHTS ........................................................................ 143

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ....................... 143

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ................... 143

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 143

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS .............................................. 143

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD ................................................. 144

LIMITED RANGE ................................................................. 144

ASR SYSTEM ......................................................................... 144

WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS AANNDD MMEESSSSAAGGEESS


134

SAFE

TYSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES

GENERAL WARNINGSThe turning on of the warning light is ac-companied by a specific message and/oracoustic warning where provided by thecontrol panel. These indications are Theseindications are concise and cautionaryand as such must not be considered as ex-haustive and/or an alternative to the in-formation contained in the OwnerHandbook, which should always be readthrough carefully and thoroughly. In theevent of a failure indication, always referto the contents of this chapter.IMPORTANT Failure indications displayedare divided into two categories: very se-rious and less serious failures.Very serious failures are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning “cycle”.Less serious failures are indicated by a shorter warning “cycle”.Press MENU ESC to stop the warningcycle in both cases. The instrument panelwarning light will stay on until the cause ofthe malfunction is eliminated.

LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL (red)

HANDBRAKEENGAGED (red)

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter a few seconds.

Low brake fluid

The warning light turns on when the levelof the brake fluid in the reservoir falls be-low the minimum level due to a possibleleak in the circuit.

On some versions the display shows thededicated message.

x

If the warning light x turnson when travelling (together

with the message on the display onsome versions), stop the car immedi-ately and contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

Handbrake applied

The warning light turns on when the hand-brake is on.

On certain versions, if the car is movingthe acoustic warning will also sound.

IMPORTANT If the warning light turns onwhen travelling, check that the handbrakeis not engaged.


135

SAFE

TYIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

AIRBAG FAILURE (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after a few seconds.

The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in the air bag system.


¬ If, when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬

does not turn on or if it stays on whentravelling, there could be a failure inretaining systems; in this event airbags or pretensioners may not be de-ployed in case of impact or, in a lowernumber of cases, they may deploy ac-cidentally. Contact your Fiat Dealer-ship immediately to have the systemchecked before driving off.

WARNING

The failure of the warninglight ¬ (warning light off) is

indicated by flashing for longer thanthe normal four seconds of the warn-ing light F that signals front pas-senger air bag deactivated.

WARNING

HOT ENGINECOOLANT (red)


The warning light turns on when the en-gine is overheated.

If the warning light comes on when dri-ving, proceed as follows:

❒ standard driving conditions: stopthe car, switch off the engine andcheck that the water level in the reser-voir is not below the MIN mark. Inthis case, wait for a few minutes forthe engine to cool down then slowlyand carefully open the cap, top-up withcoolant and check that the level is be-tween the MIN and MAX marks onthe reservoir itself. Also check visuallyfor any fluid leaks. Should the warn-ing light turn on again at the next start-up, contact a Fiat Dealership.

ç


136

SAFE

TYSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

❒ If the vehicle is used under de-manding conditions (e.g. towingtrailers uphill or fully loaded): slowdown and, if the light stays on, stop thecar. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes with theengine running and slightly acceleratedto further favour the coolant circula-tion. Then stop the engine. Check thecorrect liquid level as described above.

IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, itis advisable to keep the engine on andslightly accelerated for a few minutes be-fore switching it off.


LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR, the warning light turns on andshould go out as soon as the engine isstarted (with the engine running at idlespeed a short delay in going out is allowed).

If the warning light comes on, either con-stantly or flashing, contact a Fiat Dealer-ship immediately.

w

2. Exhausted engine oil (only MultiJet versions with DPF)

The warning light will flash and a specificmessage will appear on the display (inversions/markets, where provided). Thewarning light may flash in the followingways, depending on the version:– one minute every two hours;– for three minute cycles with the warn-ing light off for intervals of five seconds un-til oil is changed.After the first indication, at each enginestart up the warning light will continueflashing as described above until the oil ischanged. For (versions/markets whereprovided), the display shows a dedicatedmessage together with the warning light.The flashing of the warning light should notbe considered as a fault, it simply informsthe customer that the oil needs to bechanged following normal car use.

Constant: LOW ENGINEOIL PRESSURE (red)

Flashing: EXHAUSTEDENGINE OIL(only MultiJet versions withDPF – red)

When the ignition key is moved to MARthe warning light switches on, and should goout as soon as the engine is started.

1. Low engine oil pressureThe warning light turns on and stays onconstantly along with a message on thedisplay (for versions/markets where pro-vided) when the system detects that en-gine oil pressure is low.

v

If the warning light vturns on when the car is trav-

elling (on certain versions togetherwith the message on the display) stopthe engine immediately and contacta Fiat Dealership.

WARNING


137

SAFE

TYIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

INCOMPLETE DOORLOCKING (red)

On some versions the warninglight turns on when one or more doors orthe tailgate are not properly closed.


An acoustic signal will sound when doorsare open and the car is moving.

´EBD FAILURE(red) (amber)

Warning lights x and >, lit at the sametime with the engine running, indicate anEBD system failure or that the system isnot available. Early locking of the rearwheels may occur in the event of violentbraking possibly causing the car to swerve.Drive very carefully to a Fiat Dealershipto have the system inspected immediately.


x >

SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)

This warning light comes on con-stantly when the car is not moving and thedriver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.It will flash, and be accompanied by abuzzer, if the front seat belts are not cor-rectly fastened when the vehicle is mov-ing. The SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system’sbuzzer can be disabled only by a Fiat Deal-ership. On some versions the system maybe reactivated from the setup menu.

<

Remember that the deterioration of theengine oil is accelerated by:

– mainly town use of the car which makesthe DPF regeneration process more fre-quent;

– use of the vehicle for short drives, inwhich the engine does not have time toreach its regular operating temperature;

– repeated interruption of the regenera-tion process, signalled by the DPF warn-ing light coming on.

If the warning light comeson, the exhausted engine oil

should be changed as soon as possi-ble, never drive more than 500 kmfrom the first switching-on of thiswarning light.Failure to observe the above may re-sult in severe damage to the engineand invalidate the warranty. Re-member that when the warning lightcomes on, it does not mean that thelevel of engine oil is low, so if the lightflashes you definitely do not need totop up the engine oil.

WARNING


138

SAFE

TYSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

EOBD/INJECTIONSYSTEM FAILURE(amber)

Under normal conditions, when the igni-tion key is turned to MAR, the warninglight comes on, but should go off as soonas the engine is started.

If the warning light remains on or comeson whilst driving, that means that the in-jection system is not working properly; inparticular, if the warning light comes onconstantly, this indicates a malfunction inthe supply/ignition system that could causeexcessive exhaust emissions, a possible lossof performance, poor driveability and highfuel consumption.

The display shows the dedicated message.

Under these conditions, you may continuetravelling at a moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.Prolonged use of the car with the warn-ing light on may cause damage. Contact aFiat Dealership as soon as possible.

The warning light switches off if the failuredisappears, but it is still stored by the sys-tem.

U

Go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible if warninglight U does not light upwhen the key is turned to

MAR or if, while travelling, the warn-ing light comes on either constantly orflashing (along with a message on thedisplay on certain versions). The oper-ation of the warning light U may bechecked by the traffic control author-ities using specific devices. Comply withthe laws and regulations of the coun-try where you are driving.

NOTE (this information applies to petrolengine only)

If the warning light is flashing, this indicatesthat the catalytic converter may be dam-aged.

If the light flashes, it is necessary to releasethe accelerator pedal to lower the speedof the engine until the warning light stopsflashing; continue the journey at moder-ate speed, trying to avoid driving condi-tions that may cause further flashing andcontact a Fiat Dealership as soon as pos-sible.

FRONT PASSENGERAIR BAGDEACTIVATED(amber)

The warning light F comes on when thefront passenger’s air bag is deactivated.

With front passenger’s air bag on, turn-ing the ignition key to MAR, the warninglight F comes on constantly for about4 seconds, it flashes for a further 4 sec-onds and then it must switch off.

The warning light F indi-cates failure of warning light

¬. This condition is indicated by in-termittent blinking of warning lightF for longer than 4 seconds. In thiscase, the warning light ¬may not in-dicate failures in the retaining sys-tems. Before resuming driving,contact a Fiat Dealership immedi-ately to have the system checked.

WARNING

F


139

SAFE

TYIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

ABS SYSTEM FAILURE(amber)


The warning light will light up when thesystem is either not working or not avail-able. Under these circumstances the brak-ing system will work as normal withoutthe extra performance offered by the ABSsystem. Drive carefully and contact a FiatDealership as soon as possible.


>FUEL RESERVE (amber)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns

on, but it should go off after a fewseconds.

The warning light turns on when about 7litres of fuel are left in the tank.

IMPORTANT The warning light will flashto indicate a system failure. Contact a FiatDealership to have the system checked.

GLOW PLUGPREHEATING (MultiJet versions – amber)

GLOW PLUGPREHEATING FAILURE (MultiJet versions –amber)

Glow plug preheating

This warning light comes on when the keyis turned to MAR. It will go out as soonas the glow plugs have reached a presettemperature. Start the engine as soon asthe warning light goes out.

IMPORTANT At high ambient tempera-tures the warning light stays on for an ex-tremely short time.

Glow plug preheating failure

The warning light flashes if there is a fail-ure in the preheating system. Contact aFiat Dealership as soon as possible.


mK


140

SAFE

TYSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

WATER IN DIESELFUEL FILTER (MultiJet versions – amber)


The warning light turns on when there iswater in the diesel filter.


c

The presence of water in thesupply circuit may cause se-vere damage to the injectionsystem and irregular engine

operation. If warning light c lights up(on some versions with the message onthe display), contact a Fiat Dealershipas soon as possible to have the systembled. If this problem is indicated im-mediately after refueling, water mayhave entered the fuel tank. In this case,immediately turn off the engine andcontact a Fiat Dealership.

CAR PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAULT – FIAT CODE (amber)

Turning the key to MAR the warning lightshould flash only once and then go off.

If with the ignition key at MAR, the warn-ing light stays on, a possible failure is in-dicated (see “Fiat Code system” in chapter“Dashboard and controls”).

IMPORTANT The turning on at the sametime of the warning lights U and Y in-dicates a failure of the Fiat CODE system.

If with the engine running the warning lightY flashes, this means that the car is notprotected by the engine immobilizer de-vice (see “Fiat Code system” in chapter“Dashboard and controls”).

Contact a Fiat Dealership to have all thekeys memorised.

YEXTERIOR LIGHTSFAULT (amber)

The warning light will come on(some versions only) when a fail-

ure to one of the following lights is de-tected:

– side lights

– brake lights

– rear fog lights

– direction indicators

– number plate lights.

The failure relating to these lights couldbe: one or more blown bulbs, a blownprotection fuse or an electric connectioncut-off.

On some versions warning light è turnson as an alternative.


W

REAR FOG LIGHTS(amber)

The warning light comes onwhen the rear fog lights are turned on.

4


141

SAFE

TYIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

GENERIC WARNING (amber)

The warning light turns on in thefollowing circumstances.

Engine oil pressure sensor failureThe warning light turns on when failure isdetected in the engine oil pressure sensor.Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the fail-ure fixed as soon as possible.

Exterior lights failure(for versions/markets where provided)

See the section on warning light 6.

Fuel cut-off switch trippedThe warning light comes on when the in-ertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered.

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

Rain sensor failure (for versions/markets where provided)The warning light comes on when a rainsensor failure is detected. Go to a FiatDealership.The display shows the dedicated message.

è Parking sensor failure (for versions/markets where provided)See the section on warning light t.

Speed limit exceeded (for versions/markets where provided)

The display shows the associated messagewhen the car exceeds the set speed limit(see “Multifunction display” in the “Dash-board and controls” section).

Diesel filter sensor failure (for versions/markets where provided)The warning light will come on when adiesel filter system failure is detected. Thedisplay shows the dedicated message (forversions/markets, where provided).

Diesel particulate filter clogged(MultiJet versions)The warning light turns on when the dieselparticulate filter is clogged and the drivingconditions do not allow the regenerationprocedure to be activated automatically.

To allow the regeneration procedure,keep the car running until the warning lightturns off.


DPF (DIESEL PARTICULATEFILTER) CLEANING IN PROGRESS(only MultiJet versions with DPF –amber)Rotating the key to MAR the warninglight (for versions/markets where pro-vided) comes on (on some versions thesymbol è is shown along with a messageon the display), but it should switch offafter a few seconds. The warning light (orthe symbol on the display) switches onconstantly to notify the driver that theDPF system needs to eliminate capturedpollutants (particulate) by the regenera-tion process. The warning light (or thesymbol on the display) does not come onduring every DPF regeneration, but onlywhen driving conditions require that thedriver is notified. To switch off the warning light (or thesymbol on the display), the car must bekept in motion until regeneration has beencompleted. As an average, the processlasts fifteen minutes. Optimal conditions for completing theprocess are achieved by travelling at 60km/h with engine revs above 2000 rpm.


142

SAFE

TYSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

ESP SYSTEM FAILURE(amber)

HILL HOLDER FAULT(amber)

ESP system fault


If the warning light does not go off or stayson together with the LED on the buttonASR OFF when travelling, contact a FiatDealership.

On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.

Note Warning light flashing when drivingindicates that the ESP system is active.

Hill Holder failure


The warning light will come on when a HillHolder system failure is detected.


áWORN BRAKE PADS(amber)(red)

The warning light on the dial turns on ifthe front brake pads are worn; in this casehave them changed as soon as possible.


d

PARKING SENSORFAILURE (amber)(for versions/markets, where provided)

The warning light turns on when failureis detected in the parking sensors.

On some versions warning light è turnson as an alternative.

Contact a Fiat Dealership.


t

If this warning light (or the symbol on thedisplay) switch on, it does not mean the caris faulty, so there is no need to take it to aworkshop. A specific message will be dis-played when the warning light (or the sym-bol on the display) comes on (for versions/markets, where provided).

The driving speed should al-ways be suitable to traffic

conditions, weather conditions andthe driver should always comply withthe Highway Code. The engine canalso be switched off if the DPF warn-ing light is on; nevertheless, repeatedinterruptions of the regenerationprocess could cause an early deterio-ration of engine oil. For this reason,always wait until the warning lightswitches off before stopping the en-gine as described above. It is not ad-visable to complete DPF regenerationwith the car stationary.

WARNING


143

SAFE

TYIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAMHEADLIGHTS (green)

FOLLOW ME HOME(green)

Sidelights and dipped beamheadlights

The warning light comes on when side/taillights or low beams are turned on.

Follow me home

The warning light will come on when thisdevice is active (see “Follow me home”in chapter “Dashboard and controls”).


3

FRONT FOG LIGHTS(green)(for versions/markets, where provided)

The warning light comes onwhen the front fog lights are turned on.

5

LEFT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR (green – intermittent)

The light comes on when the direction in-dicator control stalk is moved downwardsor, together with the right-hand arrow,when the hazard warning light button ispressed.

F

RIGHT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR (green – blinking)

The light comes on when the direction in-dicator control stalk is moved upwards or,together with the left-hand arrow, whenthe hazard warning light button is pressed.

D

CRUISE CONTROL (green)(for versions/markets,

where provided)


The warning light turns on together withthe message on the display when turningthe ring nut of the Cruise Control to ON.


Ü

MAIN BEAMHEADLIGHTS (blue)

The warning light comes onwhen the main beams are turned on.

1


144

SAFE

TYSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

G

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

ASR SYSTEM (versions with multifunction display)

The ASR system can be turned off bypressing the button ASR OFF.

The display will show a specific messageto warn the driver that the system is off;at the same time, the button LED will turnon.

When you press button ASR OFF again,the button LED will turn off and the dis-play will show a specific message to informthe driver that the system is on again.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD (versions with multifunction display)

This starts flashing when the outside tem-perature reaches or falls below 3°C towarn the driver of the possible presenceof ice on the road.

The display will show a specific message.

LIMITED RANGE(versions with multifunction display)

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage to warn the driver that the drivingrange is less than 50 km.


145

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................. 146

REPLACING A WHEEL ...................................................... 147

QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT FIX&GO Automatic .......... 153

CHANGING A BULB ......................................................... 157

REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS ...................................... 160

REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS ....................................... 165

REPLACING FUSES ............................................................. 168

BATTERY RECHARGING ................................................. 174

RAISING THE CAR ............................................................. 175

TOWING THE CAR ........................................................... 175

IINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYYIn an emergency we recommend that you call the free-phone number found on the Warranty Booklet.

You can also go to the www.fiat.com website to find your nearest Fiat Dealership.


146

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

STARTING THE ENGINE

EMERGENCY START-UP

If the instrument panel warning light Ystays on permanently, contact a FiatDealership immediately.

JUMP STARTING fig. 1

If the battery is flat, the engine may bestarted using an auxiliary battery with thesame capacity or a little higher than theflat one.

Proceed as follows to start the car:

❒ connect the positive terminals (+ nearthe terminal) of the two batteries witha jump lead;

❒ with a second lead, connect the negativeterminal (−) of the auxiliary battery to anearthing point E on the engine or thegearbox of the car to be started;

❒ start the engine;

❒ when the engine has been started, fol-low the sequence above in reverse or-der to remove the leads.

If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not keep trying but contact a FiatDealership.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries:any sparks may ignite the explosive gaswhich could come out of the battery. If theauxiliary battery is installed on anothercar, prevent any contact between metalparts of the cars and the flat battery.

fig. 1 F0R0242m

This procedure must be per-formed by qualified person-

nel as incorrect actions may causehigh-intensity electrical discharge. Fur-thermore, battery fluid is poisonousand corrosive: avoid contact with skinand eyes. Keep naked flames awayfrom the battery. No smoking. Do notcause sparks.

WARNING


147

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

BUMP STARTING

Never bump start the engine by pushing,towing or driving downhill. This couldcause a flow of fuel into the catalytic con-verter and damage it beyond repair.

IMPORTANT Remember that the brakebooster and the power steering systemare not active until the engine is started,so you will need to apply much more forceto the brake pedal or steering wheel.

CHANGING A WHEEL

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Wheel changing and correct use of thejack and spare wheel call for some pre-cautions as listed below.

Alert other drivers that thecar is stationary in compli-

ance with local regulations: hazardwarning lights, warning triangle, etc.Any passengers on board should leavethe car, especially if it is heavily laden.Passengers should stay away from on-coming traffic while the wheel is be-ing changed. Apply the handbrake.

WARNING

The spare wheel provided isspecific for your vehicle.

Therefore, it must not be used on dif-ferent models and you should not usespare wheels from other models onyour vehicle. The wheel bolts are spe-cific for your vehicle: do not use themon different models and do not usebolts from other models on your car.

WARNING

Repair and refit the standardwheel as soon as possible.

Do not grease the threads of bolts be-fore fitting them: they might slip out.

WARNING


148

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

The jack provided is only in-tended to be used for replac-

ing tyres on the vehicle with which it issupplied, or on same-model vehicles.Never use the jack for other purposes,such as lifting other car models. Neveruse it for repair operations under thevehicle. Incorrectly positioning the jackmay cause the vehicle to fall. Do notuse the jack for loads higher thanthose shown on the label.

WARNING

Incorrect hub cap assemblymay cause it to come off

when the car is moving. Never tam-per with the inflating valve. Never in-troduce tools of any kind between rimand tyre. Check tyre and spare wheelpressure regularly, referring to thevalues shown in the “Technical spec-ifications” section.

WARNING Please note that:

❒ the jack weighs 1.76 kg;

❒ the jack requires no adjustment;

❒ the jack cannot be repaired. If it breaks,it must be replaced with the same type;

❒ no tool other than its cranking devicemay be fitted on the jack.


149

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

To change a wheel proceed as follows:

❒ stop the car in a position so that it isnot a danger for on-coming traffic andwhere you can replace the wheel safely.The ground must be flat and sufficientlycompact;

❒ turn the engine off and pull up the hand-brake;

❒ engage first gear or reverse;

❒ wear the reflective safety jacket (com-pulsory by law in certain countries) be-fore getting out of the car;

❒ open the tailgate and lift the mat;

❒ unscrew the locking device A-fig. 2;

❒ take out the toolbox C and bring it tothe wheel to be replaced;

❒ take the spare wheel B;

fig. 2 F0R0107m


150

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

❒ loosen the fixing bolts by about one turnwith the wrench provided E-fig. 3; inthe case of alloy wheel rims, shake thecar to make it easier to separate therim from the wheel hub;

❒ operate the device F-fig. 4 to extend thejack until the top of the jack G-fig. 4 fitscorrectly into jacking point H-fig. 4;

❒ warn all bystanders that the car is aboutto be lifted. They must stay clear andnot touch the car until it is back on theground;

❒ fit the handle L-fig. 4 to operate thejack and lift the car until the wheel isseveral centimetres off the ground;

fig. 3 F0R0108m

fig. 4 F0R0155m


151

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ for versions with wheel caps, remove thecap after unscrewing the three fasteningbolts and finally unscrew the fourth boltL-fig. 5 and remove the wheel;

❒ make sure the contact surfaces betweenspare wheel and hub are clean so thatthe fastening bolts will not come loose;

❒ fit the spare wheel by inserting the firstbolt two threads into the hole closestto the inflation valve;

❒ fit the wheel cap by aligning the cres-cent hole with the bolt you have fittedusing the wrench;

❒ tighten the fastening bolts;

❒ turn the jack handle L-fig. 4 to lowerthe car and remove the jack;

❒ use the wrench provided to fasten thebolts completely, passing from one boltto the opposite one, in the order shownin fig. 6;

❒ if you are replacing an alloy wheel andwish to store it temporarily in the sparewheel compartment, you should posi-tion it upside down with the display sur-face upwards.

REFITTING THE STANDARD WHEEL

Following the procedure described previ-ously, raise the car and remove the sparewheel.

fig. 5 F0R0156m fig. 6 F0R0157m


152

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Versions with steel rims

Proceed as follows:

❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-tween standard wheel and hub areclean so that the fastening bolts will notcome loose;

❒ fit the standard wheel by inserting thefirst bolt two threads into the hole clos-est to the inflation valve;

❒ fit the hub cap by aligning the crescenthole with the bolt you have fitted, theninsert the other 3 bolts;

❒ using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts;

❒ lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ using the wrench provided, fully tightenthe bolts in the sequence shown previously.

Versions with alloy rims

Proceed as follows:

❒ place the wheel on the hub and tightenthe bolts using the wrench provided;

❒ lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ using the wrench provided, fully tightenthe bolts in the sequence shown previously.

When you have finished

❒ stow the spare wheel in the space pro-vided in the boot;

❒ put the jack back in its container C-fig. 2 partially open, forcing it slightlyagainst the container walls to preventit from rattling around when travelling;

❒ put the tools back into their locations;

❒ stow the container C-fig. 2, completewith tools, inside the spare wheel;

❒ tighten the tool box clamping device A-fig. 2;

❒ reposition the mat in the luggage compartment.


153

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

QUICK TYRE REPAIR KITFIX&GO Automatic

The Fix&Go Automatic quick tyre repairkit is placed in the boot under the mat.

The kit fig. 7 includes:

❒ a bottle A with the sealer and fittedwith:

– filling tube B;

– a sticker C with the writing “max.80 km/h” to be placed in a positionclearly visible by the driver (on thedashboard) after repairing the tyre;

❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 8), to beused for prompt and proper use of thequick repair kit and then presented tothe personnel charged with handling thetreated tyre;

❒ compressor D-fig. 7 including gaugeand connections;

❒ a pair of protective gloves located in theside space of the compressor;

❒ adapters for inflating different elements.

fig. 7 F0R0158m

The quick repair kit also contains a screw-driver and a tow hook.

fig. 8 F0R0159m

Hand over the instructionbooklet to the staff charged

with treating the tyre repaired withthe kit.

WARNING

In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it ispossible to repair tyres show-ing holes on the tread or

shoulder of up to 4 mm in diameter.

Holes and damage on thetyre side walls cannot be re-

paired. Do not use the quick tyre re-pair kit if the damage is due torunning with flat tyre.

WARNING

If the wheel rim has beendamaged (bent so as to cause

air to leak), the wheel may not be re-paired. Do not remove the foreignbody (screw or nail) from the tyre.

WARNING


154

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IMPORTANT INFORMATION:

The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repairkit is effective with external temperaturesbetween −20°C and +50°C.

The sealing fluid has an expiration date.

Do not operate the compres-sor for longer than 20 con-

secutive minutes. Risk of overheating.Tyres repaired with the quick tyre re-pair kit must only be used temporarily.

WARNING

The cylinder contains ethyl-ene glycol. Contains latex:

may cause an allergic reaction. Harm-ful if swallowed. Eye irritant. Maycause irritation if inhaled or on con-tact. Avoid contact with eyes, skin andclothes. In the event of contact, washimmediately with plenty of water. Ifingested, do not induce vomiting.Rinse out your mouth, drink largequantities of water and seek immedi-ate medical attention. Keep awayfrom children. The product must notbe used by asthmatics. Do not inhalethe vapours during insertion and suc-tion. Call a doctor immediately if al-lergic reactions are noted. Store thebottle in the specific compartment,away from sources of heat. Thesealant fluid has an expiry date.

WARNING Replace the bottle containingout-of-date sealant fluid. Dis-pose of the bottle and thesealant liquid properly. Have

the sealing fluid and the cylinder dis-posed of in compliance with nationaland local regulations.


155

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

INFLATION PROCEDURE

Wear the protective glovesprovided together with quick

tyre repair kit.

WARNING

❒ Engage the handbrake. Remove thetyre valve cap, extract the flexible fillertube A-fig. 9 and fasten the ring nut Bonto the tyre valve;


❒ make sure that switch D-fig. 10 of thecompressor is in position 0 (off), startthe engine, plug into the nearest powersocket E-fig. 11 and operate the com-pressor turning the switch D-fig. 10 toposition I (on). Inflate the tyre to thepressure value specified in the para-graph “Inflation pressure” in the chap-ter “Technical specifications”.

For a more accurate reading, checkpressure gauge F-fig. 10 with the com-pressor off;

❒ if after five minutes it is still impossi-ble to reach at least 1.5 bar, releasethe compressor from the valve andpower socket, then move the car for-ward by approx. ten metres in orderto distribute the sealing fluid inside thetyre evenly, then repeat the inflationoperation;

❒ if after this operation it is still not pos-sible to reach at least 1.8 bar after fiveminutes, do not start driving since thetyre is excessively damaged and the fasttyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-able sealing. Contact a Fiat Dealership;


156

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-store proper pressure (with enginerunning and handbrake on) and restart;

❒ drive with the utmost care to the near-est Fiat Dealership.

FOR CHECKING ANDRESTORING PRESSURE ONLY

The compressor can also be used solelyfor restoring pressure. Release the cou-pling A-fig. 14 and connect directly to thetyre valve fig. 13. In this way, the bottlewill not be connected to the compressorand no sealant will be injected.

Inform the dealership thatthe tyre has been repaired

using the quick tyre repair kit. Givethe instruction booklet to the per-sonnel charged with handling thetreated tyre.

WARNING

fig. 13 F0R0111m

❒ if the tyre reaches the pressure speci-fied in paragraph “Inflation pressure” insection “Technical Specifications”, startdriving immediately;

fig. 12 F0R0110m

Apply the adhesive label in a position clearly visible by

the driver as a reminder that the tyrehas been treated with the quick re-pair kit. Drive carefully, particularlyon bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not accelerate or brake suddenly.

WARNING

❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check the tyre pressure again (fig. 12); remember to engage thehandbrake;

If the pressure falls below 1.8bar, do not drive any further:

the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go au-tomatic cannot guarantee properhold because the tyre is too damaged.Go to a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING


157

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

BOTTLE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

To replace the bottle, proceed as follows:

❒ release the coupling A-fig. 14;

❒ turn the bottle to be replaced counter-clockwise and raise it;

❒ fit the new bottle and turn it clockwise;

❒ connect the coupling A to the bottleand fit the transparent tube B into itsallocated space.

fig. 14 F0R0161m

CHANGING A BULB

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

❒ When a light is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging a bulb. For the location offuses, refer to the paragraph “Replac-ing fuses” in this section;

❒ before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation;

❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by othersof the same type and power;

❒ for safety reasons, always check the di-rection of the headlight beam afterchanging a bulb.

Halogen bulbs must be handledby holding the metallic partonly. Touching the transparentpart of the bulb with your fin-

gers may reduce the intensity of the lightemitted and even compromise the life ofthe bulb itself. In the event of acciden-tal contact, wipe the bulb with an alco-hol-soaked cloth and leave to dry.

Modifications or repairs tothe electrical system (ECUs)

that are not carried out properly ordo not take the system technical spec-ifications into account can cause mal-functions leading to the risk of fire.

WARNING


158

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TYPES OF BULBS

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car:

A Glass bulbs: clipped into position. Pullto remove.

B Bayonet-type bulbs: to remove fromits holder, press the bulb in and turnit counterclockwise.

C Tubular bulbs: release them fromtheir contacts to remove.

D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb,release the clip holding the bulb inplace.

Halogen bulbs contain pres-surised gas; in the case of

breakage they may burst.

WARNING

fig. 15 F0R0112m

IMPORTANT When the weather is coldor damp or after heavy rain or after wash-ing, the surface of headlights or rear lights,may steam up and/or form drops of con-densation on the inside. This is a naturalphenomenon due to the difference in tem-perature and humidity between the insideand the outside of the glass which doesnot indicate a fault and does not compro-mise the normal operation of lighting de-vices. The mist disappears quickly whenthe lights are turned on, starting from thecentre of the diffuser, extending progres-sively towards the edges.


159

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Bulbs Figure ref. Type Power

Main beam headlamps

Dipped headlamps

Front side lights

Front fog lights (for versions/markets where available)

Front direction indicators

Side direction indicators

Rear direction indicators

Rear side lights

Brake lights

Third brake light (additional brake light)

Reverse lights

Rear fog lights

Number plate lights

Front roof light with spot lights

Rear roof light with movable lens

Boot light

Puddle light

Courtesy light

Courtesy light

Glove compartment courtesy light

H1U55W

H755W

W5W

H1U55W

PY21W

WY5W

Y21W

R5W

P21W

5W

P21W

P21W

W5W

10W x 2

10W

W5W

W5W

1,2W x 2

C5W

C5W

D

D

A

–

B

A

B

B

B

B

–

–

A

C

C

A

C

C

C

C

55W

55W

5W

55W

21W

5W

21W

5W

21W

5W

21W

21W

5W

10W

10W

5W

5W

1,2W

5W

5W


160

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

REPLACING EXTERIORBULBS

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“Changing a bulb”.

FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS fig. 16

The front light clusters contain side lights,dipped beam, main beam and direction in-dicator bulbs.

The bulbs are arranged inside the lightcluster as follows:

A dipped headlights

B side lights

C main beam headlights (two lights)

D direction indicators.

SIDE LIGHTS fig. 17

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the snap-on cover;

❒ press in tabs B and remove the bulbholder;

❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder and refit the cap,ensuring that it locks into place.

fig. 16

C B D

A

F0R0220m fig. 17 F0R0221m


161

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 18


❒ remove the snap-on guard;

❒ disconnect the central electrical con-nector and release the bulb holdercatch;

❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;

❒ fit the new bulb, aligning the outlines ofthe metallic part with the grooves onthe reflector;

❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnectthe electrical connector;

❒ refit the guard and check that it is cor-rectly locked.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 19


❒ remove the snap-on guard;

❒ disconnect the central electrical con-nector and release the bulb holdercatch;

❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;

❒ refit the new bulb;

❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnectthe electrical connector;

❒ refit the guard and check that it is cor-rectly locked.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Front fig. 19/a


❒ steer the right/left wheel outwards;

❒ turn the catch as shown by the arrow,then use the lid;

❒ remove the bulb holder cover rotatingit counterclockwise;

fig. 18 F0R0222m fig. 19/a F0R0224mfig. 19 F0R0223m


162

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

❒ take out the bulb D pressing it slightlyand rotating it counterclockwise (bay-onet fitting), then replace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder cover C by turn-ing it clockwise and locking it properly;

❒ close the lid and turn the fasteningdevice.

Side lights fig. 20


❒ slide the lens A to compress the inter-nal catch B, then pull the unit outwards;

❒ rotate the bulb holder C counter-clockwise, take out the snap-on bulb Dand replace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder C in the lens, ro-tating it clockwise;

❒ refit the unit making sure the internalcatch B clicks into place.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided)

Contact a Fiat Dealership to have bulbsfor the front fog lights A-fig. 21 replaced.

REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS fig. 22-23Rear light clusters contain side lights,brake lights, direction indicators, revers-ing and rear fog light bulbs.

The bulbs are arranged inside the lightcluster as follows:A brake lights (two lights)B side lightsC rear fog lightsD direction indicatorsE reversing light.

fig. 20 F0R0226m fig. 22

D

A B C

EF0R0227mfig. 21 F0R0114m


163

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 23/a F0R0228m

To change the bulb proceed as follows:

❒ open the tailgate, then loosen the two fastening screws G;

❒ disconnect the central electrical connector and pull the lens unitoutwards;

❒ loosen the clips F and remove the bulb holder;

❒ remove the bulb that needs replacing A, B, C or D by pushing itin slightly and turning it counterclockwise (“bayonet” fixing), thenreplace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder and refasten the clips F;

❒ to replace the rear fog light, release the clips H – fig. 24, removethe guard and replace the bayonet bulb.

❒ reconnect the electrical connector, reposition the light cluster cor-rectly on the body and then tighten the fixing screws G.

fig. 24 F0R0230mfig. 23/b F0R0229m


164

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

❒ open the tailgate;

❒ disconnect the electrical connection A-fig. 25;

❒ undo the two lateral pins B-fig.25;

❒ take out the bulb holder;

❒ take out and replace the bulbs, fig. 26.

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS fig. 27-28

To change the bulb proceed as follows:❒ manipulate the point shown by the arrow

and remove the lens unit A-fig. 27;❒ replace the bulb fig. 28 by releasing it

from the side contacts and making surethe new bulb is correctly fastened be-tween these contacts;

❒ refit the snap-on lens unit.

fig. 25 F0R0252m fig. 26 F0R0253m

fig. 27 F0R0123m

fig. 28 F0R0124m


165

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

REPLACING INTERIORBULBS

For the type of bulb and relevant powerrating, see “Changing a bulb”.

FRONT ROOF LIGHT

Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:

❒ manipulate the points shown by thearrows and remove the roof light A-fig. 29;

❒ open the protective lid B-fig. 30;

❒ replace the bulbs C releasing themfrom the side contacts; make sure thatnew bulbs are correctly clamped be-tween these contacts;

❒ close the lid B-fig. 30 and secure theroof light A-fig. 29 into its housingmaking sure that it locks into place.

REAR ROOF LIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided)

Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:

❒ manipulate the points shown by thearrows and remove the roof light D-fig. 31;

❒ open the protective lid E-fig. 32;

❒ replace the bulb F-fig. 32 by releasingit from the side contacts and making surethat the new bulb is correctly clampedbetween these contacts;

❒ close the protective lid E-fig. 32 andinsert the roof light D-fig. 31 into itshousing locking it properly.

fig. 29 F0R0115m

fig. 30 F0R0117m

fig. 31 F0R0116m

fig. 32 F0R0118m


166

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT fig. 33

To change the bulb proceed as follows:

❒ open the mirror cover A;

❒ extract the lens B levering in the pointsshown by the arrow;

❒ delicately lift the bulb holder C from itsseat, extract the snap-on bulb and re-place it;

❒ correctly reposition the bulb holder Cin its seat;

❒ refit the lens B inserting it in its correctposition firstly on one end and then onthe other until it clicks into place.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTLIGHT fig. 34

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ remove the roof light A levering in the

point shown by the arrow.❒ open the guard B and replace the snap-

on bulb;❒ re-close the protective cover B on the

lens;❒ refit the roof light A inserting it in its

correct position firstly on one endand then on the other until it clicksinto place.


PUDDLE LIGHTS fig. 35-36(for versions/markets, where provided)


❒ take out the roof light by pressing clipA-fig. 35 with a screwdriver;


167

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ press the bulb shield sides B-fig. 36 atthe position of the two fastening pins andturn it;

❒ replace the snap-on bulb C-fig. 36;

❒ reposition the bulb shield by fitting thetwo fastening pins;

❒ refit the roof light inserting first endD-fig. 35 and then pressing the otherend until hearing the locking click ofthe clip.

GLOVE BOX LIGHT, fig. 37-38(for versions/markets where provided)


❒ manipulate the points shown by thearrows and remove the roof light A-fig. 37;

❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 38 by releasingit from the side contacts and makingsure that the new bulb is correctlyclamped between these contacts;

❒ refit the roof light A-fig. 37 in its hous-ing and make sure it is correctlyclamped.

fig. 37 F0R0303m fig. 38 F0R0304mfig. 36 F0R0121m


168

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

REPLACING FUSES

GENERAL INFORMATION

The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it operates if there is afault or improper intervention in the sys-tem.

Check the conditions of the correspond-ing fuse when a device does not work: thefilament A-fig. 39 must be intact. If it isnot, replace the blown fuse with anotherwith the same amperage (same colour).

B intact fuse;

C fuse with damaged filament.

fig. 39 F0R0122m

Do not replace one fuse withanother of greater amper-

age; FIRE HAZARD.

WARNING

Never replace a damaged fusewith metal wires or other re-cycled material.

If a general protection fuse(MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE,

MAXI-FUSE) is activated, contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

If the same fuse blows again,contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

If a general protection fusefor safety systems (air bag

system, braking system), power unitsystems (engine system, transmissionsystem) or steering system blows, con-tact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

Before replacing a fuse, makesure that the ignition key hasbeen removed and that all theother services are switched off

and/or disengaged.


169

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

ACCESSING THE FUSES

The fuses are grouped in three units onthe dashboard, in the engine compartmentand on the positive battery terminal.

fig. 41 F0R0165m

fig. 40 F0R0125m

Dashboard fuse box fig. 41

To access the dashboard fuse box, loosenthe screws A-fig. 40 and remove the cover.


170

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Engine compartment fuse box fig. 43

To access the fuse box located next to thebattery, remove the protective cover fig. 42.

fig. 42 F0R0127m

fig. 43 F0R0166m

If you need to wash the en-gine compartment, take carenot to directly aim for the en-gine compartment fuse box

with the jet of water.


171

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

7.5

7.5

7.5

15

20

20

7.5

7.5

7.5

20

10

30

7.5

20

F12

F13

F31

F32

F33

F34

F35

F36

F37

F38

F39

F40

F41

F43

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE

Dashboard fuse box fig. 41

USERS FUSE AMPS

Right dipped beam headlight

Left dipped beam headlight, headlight alignment corrector

INT/A for relay coils (T08, T17) in engine compartment fuse box and body computer node

Heated seats

Electric windows control unit (left rear window motor)

Electric windows control unit (right rear window motor)

+15 reversing lights, NC brake lights control, flow meter, glow plug preheating unit, water in diesel fuel sensor,speedometer generator

Electric window control unit (+30 for electronics)

+15 control panel, NO brake lights control

Body Computer Node

Radio node, climate control system node, Blue&MeTM node

Heated rear window

Mirror defrosters

Windscreen wiper control (two-way pump)


172

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

USERS FUSE AMPS

Cigar lighter or power socket

Boot lock actuator

Electric window unit (driver’s side front window motor)

Electric window unit (passenger’s side front window motor)

+15 control lighting: radio on steering wheel, control panels, electric mirrors, window control unit, chromic mirror and rain sensor

+15 cruise control, provision for radio, provision for Blue&MeTM,parking sensors, climate control system node

Electric window unit, driver’s seat adjustment motor

Body computer and instrument panel node

F44

F45

F47

F48

F49

F51

F52

F53

15

10

20

20

7.5

7.5

15

7.5


173

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

10

7.5

7.5

7.5

15

20

10

15

F10

F14

F15

F19

F21

F23

F24

F30

Engine compartment fuse box fig. 43

USERS FUSE AMPS

Horn

Right main beam headlight

Left main beam headlight

Air conditioning compressor

Fuel pump

Windscreen wiper motor

Free

Fog lights


174

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

BATTERY RECHARGING

IMPORTANT The battery recharging pro-cedure is given as information only. Thisoperation should be performed at a FiatDealership.

Charging should be slow at a low ampererating for approximately 24 hours. Rapidbattery charging with high currents coulddamage the battery.

Battery fluid is poisonousand corrosive: avoid contact

with your skin and eyes. The batteryshould be charged in a well ventilatedplace, away from naked flames orpossible sources of sparks: danger ofexplosion and fire.

WARNINGCharge the battery as follows:

❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal;

❒ connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals, observing the polarity;

❒ turn on the battery charger;

❒ after recharging, turn the battery chargeroff before disconnecting the battery;

❒ reconnect the battery negative terminal.

Do not attempt to charge a frozen battery: it must be

thawed first, otherwise it may ex-plode. If freezing has occurred, thebattery should be checked by skilledpersonnel to make sure that the in-ternal elements are not damaged andthat the body is not cracked, with therisk of leaking poisonous and corro-sive acid.

WARNING


175

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 45 F0R0129m

RAISING THE CAR

If the car needs to be jacked up, go to a Fiat Dealership which is equipped withshop jacks and jack arms.

Lift the car exclusively by positioning thejack arms or the shop jack in the pointsshown in the figure.

TOWING THE CARThe tow hook provided with the car ishoused in the tool box under the luggagecompartment carpet.

The front and rear tow hooksshould be used only for emer-gencies on the road. The carcan be towed for short dis-

tances using an appropriate device in ac-cordance with the highway code (a rigidbar); it can be moved on the road inreadiness for towing or transporting witha tow truck. Tow hooks MUST NOT beused to tow vehicles off the road orwhere there are obstacles and/or fortowing operations using cables orother non-rigid devices. Respecting theabove conditions, towing must takeplace with two vehicles (one towing,the other towed) aligned as much aspossible along the same centre line.


176

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

ATTACHING THE TOW HOOK fig. 46-47Proceed as follows:❒ release the cap A;❒ take the tow hook B from its support;

❒ fully tighten the hook on the rear orfront threaded pin.

The brake servo and powersteering will not work while

the vehicle is being towed. You willtherefore need to apply more force tothe brake pedal and steering wheel.Do not use flexible cables when tow-ing and avoid jerky movements. Dur-ing towing, make sure that the trailerhitch does not damage any compo-nents it is touching. Respect the rulesof the highway code when towing thecar, specifically in relation to the tow-ing device and behaviour on the road.

WARNING

fig. 46 F0R0130m

fig. 47 F0R0131m

Do not start the engine whilethe car is being towed.

WARNING

Clean the threaded housingcarefully before fastening the

hook. Make sure that the hook is se-curely fastened before towing the car.

WARNING

Release the steering wheellock before towing (see “Ig-

nition device” in “Dashboard andcontrols”).

WARNING


177

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................. 178

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN ..................................... 179

PERIODIC CHECKS ............................................................ 183

HEAVY-DUTY USE OF THE CAR .................................. 183

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS .............................................. 184

AIR CLEANER ...................................................................... 190

POLLEN FILTER ................................................................... 190

BATTERY ............................................................................... 190

WHEELS AND TYRES ........................................................ 193

RUBBER HOSES ................................................................... 194

WINDSCREEN WIPER ...................................................... 194

BODYWORK ....................................................................... 196

INTERIORS ............................................................................ 199

SSEERRVVIICCIINNGG AANNDD CCAARREE


178

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

IMPORTANT Scheduled Servicing Cou-pons are required by the manufacturer.Failure to have them carried out may in-validate the warranty.

Scheduled Servicing can be carried out by any Fiat Dealership, at pre-estab-lished times.

If during each operation, in addition to theones scheduled, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these mayonly be carried out with the expressagreement of the Customer.

IMPORTANT You are advised to contacta Fiat Dealership immediately in the eventof any minor operating faults, withoutwaiting for the next service.

If the car is used frequently for towing atrailer, the interval between servicesshould be reduced.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct servicing is essential in guaran-teeing a long life for the car under the bestconditions.

For this reason, Fiat has prepared a se-ries of checks and maintenance operationsto be performed every 30,000 km.

It is, however, important to rememberthat scheduled servicing does not com-pletely cover all the car’s requirements:even in the initial period before 30,000 km,and then subsequently between one ser-vice and another, ordinary care is alwaysrequired such as routine checks involvingtopping up fluid level, checking tyre pres-sures etc...


179

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN

PETROL VERSIONS

Service coupons must be performed every 30,000 km

Thousands of km

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if required

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check operation of windscreen washer/wiper

Check front disc brake pad conditions and wear

Check rear disc brake pad condition and wear (T-JET version)

Check rear drum brake linings condition and wear

Visually inspect the conditions of: bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust – fuel system – brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

Check tension of accessory drive belt(s) and adjust if necessary (1.4 heated)

Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belt(s)

Replace accessory drive belt(s)

Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required

Check and adjust tappet clearance, if required


180

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

2 If the vehicle is mainly used for town driving or has an annual mileage of less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and fil-ter should be changed every 12 months.

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

Thousands of km

Check exhaust gas emissions

Check battery charge status and possibly recharge

Replace air cleaner cartridge

Replace spark plugs 1

Top-up fluid levels (engine coolant, brake fluid, battery, window washer, etc.)

Check condition of timing drive belt (1.4 and 1.4 T-JET versions)

Check operation of engine management systems(using diagnosis socket)

Replace toothed timing drive belt (*)

Change engine oil and oil filter (or every 24 months) 2

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)

Replace pollen filter (or every 24 months)

(*) Regardless of the mileage, the timing drive belt must be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, town driving, idling for a long time, dusty areas) or, in any case, every 5 years

1 For the 1.4 T-JET version, the following operations are extremely important to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:- only use spark plugs specifically certified for T-JET engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand (see the “Engine” paragraph);- adhere strictly to the spark plug replacement intervals detailed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan; - it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership


181

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

DIESEL VERSIONS

Service coupons must be performed every 30,000 km

Thousands of km

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if required

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check operation of windscreen washer/wiper

Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades

Check condition and wear of front and rear disc brake pads (for versions/markets where provided)

Check rear drum brake linings condition and wear

Visually inspect the conditions of: bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust – fuel system – brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belt(s)

Replace accessory drive belt(s)

Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required


182

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

Thousands of km

Check exhaust gas emissions/smokiness

Check battery charge status and possibly recharge

Replace fuel filter

Replace air cleaner cartridge

Top-up fluid levels (engine coolant, brake fluid, battery, window washer, etc.)

Check operation of engine management systems(using diagnosis socket)

Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (1.6 Multijet versions)

Change engine oil and oil filter (versions without DPF)(or every 24 months)

Change engine oil and oil filter (versions with DPF) (**)

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)

Replace pollen filter (or every 24 months)

(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing drive belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, town driving, longperiods of idling) or at least every 5 years

(**) The engine oil and filter should be replaced according to their true conditions, displayed by a message or warning light in the instrument panel or at leastevery 24 months.

If the car is used mainly for town driving, the engine oil and filter should be changed every 12 months.


183

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

HEAVY-DUTY USE OF THE CAR

If the vehicle is mainly used in one of thefollowing particularly harsh conditions:

❒ trailer or caravan towing;

❒ dusty roads;

❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) andwith external temperatures below zero;

❒ frequently idling engine or long-dis-tance, low-speed driving (e.g. door-to-door deliveries) or lengthy inactivity;

❒ driving in towns and cities;

you should perform the following inspec-tions more frequently than shown on theScheduled Servicing Plan:

❒ check front disc brake pad conditionsand wear;

❒ check cleanliness of bonnet and bootlocks, and cleanliness and lubricationof linkages;

❒ visually inspect the conditions of: en-gine, gearbox, transmission, pipes andtubes (exhaust – fuel – brakes), rubberparts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);

❒ check charge conditions and batteryfluid level (electrolyte) (see chapter“Charge conditions check”);

❒ visually inspect the condition of the ac-cessory drive belts;

❒ check pollen filter and replace, if re-quired;

❒ check air filter and replace, if required.

PERIODIC CHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,check and, if necessary, top up the fol-lowing:

❒ engine coolant fluid level;

❒ brake fluid level;

❒ windscreen washer fluid level;

❒ tyre pressure and conditions;

❒ operation of lights (headlights, direc-tion indicators, hazard lights, etc.);

❒ operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system, position and wear ofthe windscreen and rear windowwiper blades;

Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if re-quired, the engine oil level.

It is recommended to use PETRONASLUBRICANTS products, designed andproduced specifically for Fiat cars (seetable “Capacities” in chapter “TechnicalSpecifications”).


184

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS

fig. 1 – 1.4 version

Never smoke while workingin the engine compartment:

gas and inflammable vapours may bepresent, with the risk of fire.

WARNING

Be careful!, when topping uptake care not to confuse thevarious types of fluids: theyare all incompatible with

one another and could seriously dam-age the car.

F0R0243m

fig. 2 – 1.4 T-JET version F0R0244m

1. Engine coolant

2. Battery

3. Windscreen washer fluid

4. Brake fluid

5. Engine oil

6. Power steering fluid


185

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

fig. 3 – 1.3 MultiJet version

1

1

6

2

4 5

3

F0R0235m

1. Engine oil

2. Engine coolant


4. Brake fluid

5. Battery


fig. 4 – 1.6 MultiJet version F0R0301m

1. Engine oil

2. Engine coolant


4. Brake fluid

5. Battery



186

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

IMPORTANT After adding or changingthe oil, let the engine turn over for a fewseconds and wait a few minutes after turn-ing it off before checking oil level.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTIONThe maximum engine oil consumption isusually 400 grams every 1000 km.When the car is new, the engine needsto run in, therefore the engine oil con-sumption can only be considered stabilisedafter the first 5000 – 6000 km.IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-pends on driving style and the car usageconditions.

ENGINE OIL – fig. 5-6-7-8

Check the oil level a few minutes (aboutfive) after the engine has stopped, with thecar parked on level ground. The oil levelshould be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the dipstick B.

The range between the MIN and MAXlevels corresponds to approximately 1 litre of oil. If the oil level is near or evenunder the MIN mark, add oil through thefiller A to reach the MAX mark. The oillevel should never exceed MAX.

Topping up the engine oil

If the oil level is near or even under theMIN mark, add oil through the filler B toreach the MAX mark.

The oil level should never exceed MAX.

IMPORTANT If the engine oil level, aftera routine check, is over the MAX mark,go to a Fiat Dealership to have the cor-rect level restored.

fig. 5 – 1.4 version F0R0134m

fig. 6 – 1.4 T-JET version F0R0245m


When the engine is hot, takecare when working inside

the engine compartment to avoidburns. Remember that when the en-gine is hot, the fan may be activated.Risk of injury. Scarves, ties and otherloose clothing may be pulled by mov-ing parts.

WARNING



187

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID fig. 10

To top-up, remove the cap A.

Use a mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35 fluid, in thefollowing concentrations:

30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 and 70% water in summer.

50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 and 50% water in winter.

At temperatures below −20°C, use undi-luted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 fluid.

Check the level through the reservoir.ENGINE COOLANT – fig. 9

The coolant level must be checked whenthe engine is cold and must be between theMIN and MAX marks on the container.If the level is low, slowly pour a mixture of50% distilled water and 50% PARAFLUUP

fig. 9 F0R0136m fig. 10

PARAFLUUP anti-freeze is usedin the engine cooling system.Use the same fluid as in thecooling system when topping

up. PARAFLUUP may not be mixed withany other types of fluids. If this hap-pens, do not under any circumstancesstart the engine and contact a FiatDealership.

Do not remove the reservoircap when the engine is very

hot: you may be scalded. The cooling system is pressurised. Ifnecessary, only replace the cap withanother genuine one or the opera-tion of the system may be adverselyaffected.

WARNING

F0R0137m

by PETRONAS LUBRICANTS throughthe filler neck A until the level approachesMAX. The mixture of 50% PARAFLUUP

and 50% distilled water protects againstfreezing down to temperatures of −35°C.For particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommended using a mixture of 60%PARAFLUUP and 40% distilled water.

Used engine oil and the re-placed oil filter contain sub-stances that are harmful tothe environment. It is advis-

able to have oil and filters changed bya Fiat Dealership, where they will bedisposed of properly and in accordancewith the law.

Do not add oil with differentspecifications than those ofthe existing engine oil.


188

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

NOTE Carefully clean the reservoir capA and the surrounding surface.

For topping-up, always use a funnel withintegrated filter with mesh equal to orlower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-ture. For this reason, if the car is mainlyused in areas with a high degree of at-mospheric humidity, the fluid should bereplaced at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”.

fig. 11 F0R0138m

Do not travel if the wind-screen washer reservoir is

empty: using the windscreen washeris essential for improving visibility.

WARNING

Some commercial additivesfor windscreen washing are

flammable. The engine compartmentcontains hot parts which could causea fire if they come into contact withthese additives.

WARNING

Prevent brake fluid, which ishighly corrosive, from com-ing into contact with paintedparts. If this occurs, immedi-

ately wash the affected areas withwater.

BRAKE FLUID – fig. 11

Undo the cap A and check that the liquidcontained in the reservoir is at the maxi-mum level.

Take great care to ensure that impuritiesdo not enter the reservoir when the capis opened.

The fluid level in the reservoir must notexceed the MAX mark.

You are advised to use the brake fluidshown in the “Fluids and lubricants” table(see section “Technical Specifications”) totop up.


189

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

Brake fluid is poisonous andhighly corrosive. If contact

accidentally occurs, immediately washthe affected areas with water and a neutral detergent, and then rinsethoroughly with water. Call a doctorimmediately if swallowed.

WARNING

The symbol π on the con-tainer indicates a synthetic

brake fluid, distinguishing it from themineral kind. Use of mineral typefluids will damage the special rub-ber seals of the braking system be-yond repair.

WARNING

Oil consumption is extremelylow; if another top-up is re-quired after only a short pe-

riod of time, have the system checkedfor leaks at a Fiat Dealership.

POWER STEERING FLUID – fig. 12

Check that the oil level with the car on flatground and the engine cold is between theMIN and MAX marks on the reservoirbody.

The level may go over the MAX markwhen the oil is hot.

If topping up is required, make sure thenew oil has the same specifications as thatalready in the system.

Do not allow the powersteering system fluid to come

into contact with hot engine parts, asit is flammable.

WARNINGfig. 12 F0R0139m


190

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

fig. 13 F0R0140m

IMPORTANT If the battery has no chargestatus and electrolyte level gauge, check-ing and possible topping-up operationsmust be carried out only by specialisedstaff, through a Fiat Dealership.

Bright white colour Top up electrolyte Contact a Fiat Dealership

Dark colour Insufficient charge Recharge the battery without green area conditions (it is recommended in the middle to contact a Fiat Dealership)

Dark colour Electrolyte level and charge No actionwith green area conditions sufficientin the middle

AIR CLEANERHave the air cleaner replaced by a FiatDealership.

POLLEN FILTERPollen filter replacement must be carriedout at a Fiat Dealership.

BATTERYThe car is fitted with a low-maintenancebattery: no top-ups with distilled water areneeded in standard conditions of use.

CHECKING THE CHARGECONDITIONS fig. 13(for versions/markets, where provided)Use the gauge A (for versions/markets,where provided) on the battery lid posi-tioned as shown in fig. 13 and take actionaccording to its colour.Refer to the table below.


191

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

CHANGING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the battery with an orig-inal spare part with the same specifications.If a battery with different specifications isfitted, the service intervals given in the“Scheduled Servicing Plan” will no longerbe valid.Follow the battery manufacturer’s in-structions for maintenance.

IMPORTANT Check the battery chargeonce a year, preferably before the begin-ning of the winter, to prevent freezing ofthe electrolyte. This check should be car-ried out more frequently if the car ismainly used for short journeys, or if it isfitted with accessories that permanentlyconsume electricity even with the ignitionkey removed, especially in the case of af-ter-market accessories.

Incorrect assembly of electricand electronic devices maycause severe damage to yourcar. Go to a Fiat Dealership if

you want to install accessories (alarms,mobile phone, etc.): they will suggestthe most suitable devices and adviseyou whether a higher capacity batteryneeds to be installed.

Batteries contain substancesthat may do great harm to theenvironment. To replace yourbattery, we recommend con-

tacting your Fiat Dealership to disposeof your old battery in full respect of theenvironment and in compliance with allapplicable laws and regulations.

If the vehicle will be unusedfor an extended period of

time in extremely cold weather con-ditions, remove the battery and storeit in a heated area to prevent it fromfreezing.

WARNING

Battery liquid is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid contact

with the skin and eyes. Keep nakedflames or possible sources of sparksaway from the battery: risk of explo-sion or fire.

WARNING

Using the battery when thefluid is too low can damage

it irreparably and generate a risk ofexplosion.

WARNING

Always wear appropriategoggles when working on or

near the battery.

WARNING


192

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

The battery will also be more at risk offreezing (this can happen as early as−10°C). Refer to the paragraph “Car in-activity” in “Starting and driving” if the caris left parked for a long time.

If after buying the car, you want to installelectric accessories which require per-manent electrical supply (alarm, etc.) oraccessories influencing the electrical sup-ply requirements, contact a Fiat Dealer-ship whose skilled personnel, in additionto suggesting the most suitable devicesfrom Lineaccessori Fiat, will evaluate theoverall electric absorption, checkingwhether the car’s electric system is capa-ble of withstanding the load required, orwhether it should be integrated with amore powerful battery.

Since these devices continue to consumeenergy even when the engine is off, theygradually run down the battery.

USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY

To avoid draining your battery and makeit last longer, observe the following in-structions:

❒ when you park the car, ensure thedoors, tailgate and bonnet are closedproperly, to prevent any light from re-maining on inside the passenger com-partment;

❒ the internal roof lights must be off. Thecar is however provided with an au-tomatic system for switching off in-ternal lights;

❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound system, hazard warning lights, etc...)switched on for a long time when theengine is not running;

❒ before performing any operation on theelectrical system, disconnect the nega-tive battery cable;

❒ battery terminals should always be com-pletely tightened.

IMPORTANT If the charge level remainsunder 50% for a long time, the battery isdamaged by sulphation, reducing its ca-pacity and starting attitude.

Total power consumption of all the ser-vices (standard and retrofitted equipment)of the vehicle should be lower than 0.6mA per Ah (of the battery) as shown inthe following table:

Battery Maximumuptake

without load

40 Ah 24 mA

50 Ah 30 mA

60 Ah 36 mA


193

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

WHEELS AND TYRES

Check the pressure of each tyre, includ-ing the space-saver wheel, approximatelyevery two weeks and before long jour-neys: the pressure should be checked withthe tyre rested and cold.

While driving the car, the pressure in-creases under standard conditions: forthe correct tyre inflation pressure, see“Wheels” in the “Technical specifica-tions” chapter.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 14:

A standard pressure: tread evenly worn.

B low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.

C high pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

The tyres must be replaced when thetread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In any case,follow the laws in force in the countrywhere you are driving.

fig. 14 F0R0141m

WARNINGS

❒ Avoid braking suddenly, burning startsand violent knocks against curbs, pot-holes or other obstacles if possible. Dri-ving for long stretches over bumpyroads can damage the tyres;

❒ check the tyres regularly for cuts on thesides, swelling or irregular tread wear.Contact a Fiat Dealership if required;

❒ avoid overloading the car when travel-ling: this may cause serious damage tothe wheels and tyres;

❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop the vehicleimmediately and change it to avoiddamage to the tyre, the rim, the sus-pensions and the steering system;

❒ a tyre will age even if it is not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread and on thesidewalls are a sign of ageing. Have thetyres checked by skilled personnel ifthey have been fitted for longer than sixyears. Also remember to check thespace-saver wheel very carefully;

❒ In the case of replacement, always fitnew tyres, avoiding those with an un-known origin;

❒ if a tyre is replaced, also change the in-flation valve;

❒ to allow even wear between the frontand rear tyres, it is advisable to changethem over every 10-15 thousand kilo-metres, keeping them on the same sideof the car so as not to reverse the di-rection of rotation.

Remember that the roadholding qualities of your car

also depend on the correct inflationpressure of the tyres.

WARNING


194

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

WINDSCREEN WIPER

BLADES

Regularly clean the rubber part using appropriate products; TUTELA PRO-FESSIONAL SC 35 is recommended.

Replace the blades if the rubber edge isdeformed or worn. In any case, it is ad-visable to replace them approximatelyonce a year.

A few simple precautions can reduce thepossibility of damage to the blades:

❒ make sure that the rubber part is notstuck to the windscreen at sub-zerotemperatures. Use a de-icing productto release it if required;

❒ remove any snow from the glass: inaddition to protecting the blades, thisprevents effort on the motor andoverheating;

❒ do not operate the windscreen wiperson dry glass.

Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,

because visibility is reduced in badweather.

WARNING

RUBBER HOSES

As far as the brake system and rubber fuelhoses are concerned, follow the “Sched-uled Servicing Plan” in this chapter carefully.

Ozone, high temperatures and prolongedlack of fluid in the system may cause hard-ening and cracking of the hoses, with pos-sible leaks. Careful checking is thereforenecessary.

If the pressure is too low, thetyre will overheat and could

be seriously damaged.

WARNING

Avoid switching the tyresfrom the right side of the ve-

hicle to the left side and vice versa.

WARNING

Never submit alloy rims to re-painting treatments requiring

the use of temperatures exceeding150°C. The mechanical properties ofthe wheels could be impaired.

WARNING


195

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

Replacing the windscreen wiperblades – fig. 15

How to remove the blade:

❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A;

❒ rotate blade B 90° around pin C, located at the end of the wiper arm;

❒ press the blade locking tabs;

❒ remove the blade from pin C. fig. 15 F0R0236m

SPRAY NOZZLES

Windscreen washer – fig. 16

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: (see“Checking fluid levels” in this chapter).

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary clean them using a needle.

The windscreen jets are directed by ad-justing the nozzle angle.

The jets must be directed at about 1/3 ofthe height from the window upper edge.

fig. 16 F0R0143m

Instructions for fitting the blade:

❒ insert the blade fastening tabs in thehole on the end of the arm;

❒ lower the arm so the blade rests backon the windscreen.


196

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY

Your car is covered by warranty againstperforation due to rust of any original el-ement of the structure or body.

For the general terms of this warranty, re-fer to the Warranty Booklet.

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of corrosion are the fol-lowing:

❒ atmospheric pollution;

❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, orhot humid climates);

❒ seasonal environmental conditions.

Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmosphericdust and sand, along with mud and gravelraised by other vehicles.

On your car, Fiat has implemented thebest technological solutions to effectivelyprotect the bodywork against corrosion.

The main ones are:

❒ painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to cor-rosion and abrasion;

❒ use of galvanised (or pretreated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corrosion;

❒ spraying the underbody, engine com-partment, internal wheel arches andother parts with highly protective waxproducts;

❒ spraying of protective plastic materialin the more exposed points: under-door, inner mudguard parts, edges,etc...;

❒ use of “open” boxed sections to preventcondensation and pockets of moisturewhich could help to form rust inside.


197

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK

Paint

Paintwork does not only serve an aes-thetic purpose, but also protects the un-derlying sheet metal.

Touch-up abrasions and scratches imme-diately to prevent the formation of rust.Only use genuine spare paint products fortouch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identifi-cation plate” in the “Technical Specifica-tions” chapter).

Standard maintenance of paintwork con-sists in washing the vehicle; its frequencydepends on the conditions and environ-ment where the vehicle is used. For ex-ample, it is advisable to wash the car moreoften in areas with high environmental pol-lution or on roads sprinkled with salt.

To wash the car correctly, proceed asfollows:

❒ wash the body using a low pressure jetof water;

❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy so-lution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing the sponge;

❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jetof air or a chamois leather.

If you put the vehicle through a car wash,follow these recommendations:

– remove the aerial from the roof so itdoes not get damaged;

– the car wash should use water added toa soapy solution;

– rinse thoroughly to prevent soap marksfrom remaining on the bodywork or lessvisible parts.

Detergents pollute water. Thevehicle should be washed inareas equipped for collectingand purifying the liquid used

in the washing process.

Dry the less visible parts with specialcare, such as the door frames, bonnetand the headlight frames, where watermay stagnate more easily. The car shouldnot be taken to a closed area immedi-ately, but left outside so that residual wa-ter can evaporate.

Do not wash the car after it has been leftin the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the car.

Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance that many speciesrelease give the paint a dull appearanceand increase the possibility of triggeringrusting processes.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and carefully as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.


198

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

Glasses

To clean glasses, use specific cleaningproducts.

Also use clean cloths to avoid scratchingthe glass or damaging the transparency.

IMPORTANT Wipe the inside surface ofthe rear window gently with a cloth in thedirection of the filaments to avoid dam-aging the heating device.

Engine compartment

Wash the engine compartment thor-oughly at the end of every winter. Be care-ful not to direct the jet of water ontoelectronic control units. Adequately pro-tect the upper air vents to prevent dam-age to the windscreen wiper motor. Havethis operation performed at a specialisedworkshop.

IMPORTANT Washing should take placewith the engine cold and the ignition keyin the STOP position. After the washingoperation, make sure that the various pro-tections (e.g. rubber caps and guards) havenot been removed or damaged.

Front headlights

IMPORTANT Never use aromatic sub-stances (e.g. petrol) or ketenes (e.g. ace-tone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of thefront headlights.


199

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandnormal wear and tear for along time. Some precautions

are however needed. Avoid prolongedrubbing against clothing accessories,such as metal buckles, bosses, Velcrostrips and the like, which by applying ahigh pressure on the fabric in a smallarea could cause the breakage of somethreads and damage the upholstery.

SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS

Remove dust with a soft brush or a vac-uum cleaner. It is advisable to use a moistbrush on velvet upholstery.

Rub the seats with a sponge and a solutionof water and mild soap.

Do not keep aerosol cans inthe vehicle: these could ex-

plode. Aerosol cans must not be ex-posed to temperatures exceeding50°C. When the vehicle is exposed tosunlight, the temperature inside cangreatly exceed this value.

WARNING

PLASTIC PARTS

It is advisable to clean interior parts witha moist cloth and a solution of water andmild neutral soap. Use specific productsfor cleaning plastic, without solvents andspecifically designed to prevent damage tothe appearance and colour of the treatedparts to remove grease and tough stains.

IMPORTANT Never use spirits or petrolto clean the instrument panel glass.

Never use flammable prod-ucts, such as petrol ether or

rectified petrol to clean the inside ofthe car. The electrostatic chargeswhich are generated by rubbing dur-ing cleaning may cause a fire.

WARNING

INTERIORS

Periodically check that water is nottrapped under the mats (due to waterdripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) whichcould cause oxidisation of the sheet metal.


200

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GSE

RVICI

NG

AND C

ARE

GENUINE LEATHER STEERINGWHEEL/GEAR LEVER KNOB

These components must be cleaned withmild soap and water only.

Never use alcohol and/or alcohol-basedproducts.

Before using off-the-shelf products de-signed for cleaning car interiors, make surethat they do not contain alcohol and/or al-cohol-based substances before using themby carefully reading the label.

If special window cleaning products acci-dentally drip onto the steering wheel orgear lever knob, wipe away immediatelyand then wash the affected area with mildsoap and water.

IMPORTANT Be careful when using a steer-ing wheel lock device, where applicable, toavoid damaging the leather upholstery byrubbing.


201

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................................. 202

ENGINE CODES – BODYWORK VERSIONS ............. 204

ENGINE .................................................................................. 205

POWER SUPPLY .................................................................. 206

TRANSMISSION .................................................................. 207

BRAKES .................................................................................. 207

SUSPENSION ........................................................................ 208

STEERING .............................................................................. 208

WHEELS ................................................................................. 209

DIMENSIONS ....................................................................... 213

PERFORMANCE .................................................................. 214

WEIGHTS .............................................................................. 215

CAPACITIES .......................................................................... 216

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................................. 217

FUEL CONSUMPTION ...................................................... 219

CO2 EMISSIONS .................................................................. 220

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS


202

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

VIN PLATE fig. 1

This is applied to the right-hand side of thespare wheel shelf and shows the follow-ing data:

B Type-approval number.

C Vehicle type identification code.

D Chassis manufacture progressive number.

E Maximum allowed vehicle weight fullyloaded.

F Maximum allowed vehicle weight fullyloaded with trailer.

G Maximum allowed weight on first axle(front).

H Maximum allowed weight on secondaxle (rear).

I Engine type.

L Bodywork version code.

M Spare part number.

N Correct smoke opacity index (fordiesel engines).

IDENTIFICATION DATA

It is advisable to take note of the identifi-cation codes. The following identificationcodes are printed and shown on theplates:

❒ VIN plate.

❒ Chassis marking.

❒ Bodywork paint identification plate.

❒ Engine marking.

fig. 1 F0R0247m


203

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

CHASSIS MARKING fig. 3

This is printed on the passenger com-partment floor, near the right front seat.

❒ car model (ZFA 323000);

❒ the chassis progressive number.

ENGINE MARKING

Engine marking is stamped on the cylinderblock and includes the model and thechassis serial number.

BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION PLATE – fig. 2

This plate is applied to the tailgate andshows the following data:

A Paint manufacturer.

B Colour name.

C Fiat colour code.

D Paint respray and touch-up code.

fig. 2 F0R0145m fig. 3 F0R0146m


204

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

ENGINE CODES – BODYWORK VERSIONS

Versions Engine code Body versions

1.4 350A1000 323AXA1A 00 (❍)323AXA1A 00B (❏)

1.4 T-JET 198A4000 323AXC1A03 (❍)

1.3 Multijet 199A3000 323AXB1A 01 (❍)

1.6 Multijet 198A3000 323AXF1A 06 (❍)323AXF1A 06B (❏)

(❍) Euro 4 versions

(❏) Euro 5 versions


205

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

ENGINE

GENERAL INFORMATION

Engine code

Cycle

Number and arrangement of cylinders

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Compression ratio

Max power (EEC) kWHP

corresponding speed rpm

Max. torque (EEC) kWkgm

corresponding speed rpm

Spark plugs

Fuel

1.3 MultiJet

199A3000

Diesel

4 in line

69.6 × 82

1248

17.6 ± 0.4

6690

4000

20020.31750

–

Automotive dieselfuel (EN 590 specification)

1.4

350A1000

Otto

4 in line

72 × 84

1368

11.1 ± 0.2

5777

6000

11511.73000

NGK ZKR7A-10

Unleaded petrol 95 RON

(EN 228 standard)

1.4 T-JET

198A4000

Otto

4 in line

72.0 × 84.0

1368

9.8

881205000

20621

1750

NGK IKR9F8

Unleaded petrol 95 RON

(EN 228 specification)

1.6 MultiJet

198A3000

Diesel

4 in line

79.5 × 80.5

1598

16.5 ± 0.4

771054000

29029.61500

–

Automotive dieselfuel (EN 590 specification)


206

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

POWER SUPPLY

1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 MultiJet – 1.6 MultiJet

Power supply Multipoint electronic injection Electronic injection Common Rail MultiJet direct injectionSequential Multipoint

phased, electronically controlledwith turbocharger and intercooler

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out properly or do not take the systemtechnical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to fire risk.

WARNING


207

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

Self-adjusting pedal without idle stroke

Front

Six forward gears plus reverse with synchronisers for forward gears

Self-adjusting pedal without idle stroke

Front

BRAKES

1.4 – 1.4 T-JET – 1.3 MultiJet – 1.6 MultiJet

Service brakes:

– front

– rear

Parking brake

IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt sprinkled on the roads may deposit on the brake discs reducing braking efficiency the first timethe brakes are applied.

controlled by hand lever, acting on rear brakes

drum / disc (1.4 T-JET and 1.6 MultiJet)

discs

Five forward gears plus reverse with synchronisersfor forward gear engagement

TRANSMISSION

1.4 – 1.4 T-JET – 1.3 MultiJet 1.6 MultiJet

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive


208

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

SUSPENSION


Front

Rear

with independent MacPherson type wheels

twisting axle with interconnected wheels

rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering

STEERING


Type

Turning circle (kerb to kerb) m 10.5 (❏)/11 (Δ)

(❏) With 15” tyres(Δ) With 16” and 17” tyres


209

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

READING TYRE MARKINGS fig. 4

Example: 185/65 R 15 88T

185 = Rated width (S, distance betweensidewalls in mm).

65 = Height/width ratio (H/S) as a percentage.

R = Radial tyre.

15 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

88 = Load rating (capacity).

T = Maximum speed rating.

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES

Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless radialcarcass tyres. The vehicle registration doc-ument also lists all type-approved tyres.

IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-cies between the information provided onthis “Owner Handbook” and the “Vehi-cle registration document”, only the lat-ter is valid.

For safe driving, the car must be fittedwith tyres of the same make and type onall wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes inthe case of tubeless tyres.

SPARE WHEEL

Pressed steel wheel. Tubeless tyre.

WHEEL GEOMETRY

Total front toe-in: 0.3 ± 1 mm

Total rear toe in: 1,7 ± 0,5 mm

The values refer to the car in running order.

fig. 4 F0R0147m

Maximum speed index

Q = up to 160 km/h.

R = up to 170 km/h.

S = up to 180 km/h.

T = up to 190 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

H = up to 210 km/h.

V = up to 240 km/h.

Maximum speed rating for snow tyres

QM + S = up to 160 km/h.

TM + S = up to 190 km/h.

HM + S = up to 210 km/h.


210

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

READING RIM MARKINGS fig. 4

Example: 6J x 15 ET44

6 = rim width in inches 1.

J = rim drop centre outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests) 2.

15 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) 3 = Ø.

ET44 = wheel camber (distance betweenthe disc/rim support plane andthe wheel rim centre line).

Load rating (capacity)

70 = 335 kg 81 = 462 kg

71 = 345 kg 82 = 475 kg

72 = 355 kg 83 = 487 kg

73 = 365 kg 84 = 500 kg

74 = 375 kg 85 = 515 kg

75 = 387 kg 86 = 530 kg

76 = 400 kg 87 = 545 kg

77 = 412 kg 88 = 560 kg

78 = 425 kg 89 = 580 kg

79 = 437 kg 90 = 600 kg

80 = 450 kg 91 = 615 kg

RIM PROTECTOR TYRES – fig. 5

fig. 5 F0R0142m

DO NOT fit wheel capswhen using caps fixed (by

springs) to the steel rim and tyresother than factory-fitted tyres pro-vided with Rim Protector (fig. 5). Theuse of unsuitable tyres and wheelcaps could cause a sudden pressureloss of the tyre.

WARNING


211

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

6J X 15” – ET 446J X 15” – ET 446J X 15” – ET 446J X 15” – ET 44

6J X 15” – ET 446J X 15” – ET 446J X 15” – ET 44

185/65 R15 88T195/60 R15 88H

185/65 R15 88T (**)185/65 R15 88T (**)

195/60 R15 88H185/65 R15 88T (**) 185/65 R15 88T (**)

185/65 R15 88T195/60 R15 88H (❏)195/55 R16 87H (❍)

205/45 R17 88V (*) (▲)

195/60 R15 88H (❍)195/55 R16 87H (❍)

205/45 R17 88V (*) (▲)

6J X 15” – ET 446J X 15” – ET 446J X 16” – ET 41

6,5J X 17” – ET 41

6J X 15” – ET 446J X 16” – ET 41

6,5J X 17” – ET 41

1.4 T-JET 1.6 Multijet

Version Rims Tyres provided Spare wheel (for versions/markets, where provided)

Rim Tyre

1.41.3 Multijet

(❏) Alloy rim

(❍) Alloy rim available for versions/markets, where provided

(*) Tyre not suitable for fitting snow chains

(▲)Tyre available for versions/markets, where provided

(**) The car maximum speed when using this spare wheel is 80 km/h


212

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

COLD TYRE PRESSURE (bar)

Tyre Medium load Full loadFront Rear Front Rear

185/65 R15 88T 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/60 R15 88H 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/55 R16 87H 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.4

205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.2 2.5 2.4

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm. However, recheck that the value is correct with the tyre cold.

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.


213

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the car equipped with the tyressupplied.

Height is measured with the vehicle unladen.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME

Capacity with vehicle unladen (VDA standards) ......................... 500 dm3

Capacity with rear seat and backrest folded over .................. 870 dm3

Versions A B C D E F G H

4560 928 2603 1029 1494/1487 (*) 1467/1471 (❏) 1946 1482.5/1483.5 (❏)

IMPORTANT Measurements may vary slightly according to rim/tyre size.(*) With lower ride (for versions/markets, where provided)(❏) Full load value

F0R0237m

1.4 – 1.3 Multijet1.4 T-JET1.6 Multijet


214

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

PERFORMANCE

Maximum speeds after initial car use, in km/h.

1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 MultiJet 1.6 MultiJet

165 195 170 190


215

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

1160

500

10009001660

1200500

75

70

1185

500

10009001685

1200500

75

70

1200

500

10009001670

1200500

75

70

1290

500

10009001790

1200500

75

70

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg) 1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 MultiJet 1.6 MultiJet

Unladen weight (with all liquids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment):

Payload (*) including the driver:

Maximum allowed loads (**)– front axle:– rear axle:– total:

Towable loads:– braked trailer:– non braked trailer:

Maximum load on roof:

Maximum load on the ball joint(braked trailer):

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sun roof, trailer towing equipment, etc.) the unladen weight will increase and consequently thepayload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.

(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platformwithin the maximum permitted loads.


216

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

CAPACITIES

Fuel tank: litresincluding a reserve of: litres

Cooling system engine: litres

Engine sump: litresEngine sump and filter: litres

Gearbox/differentialcasing: kg

Power steering: kg

Hydraulic brake circuit: kg

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir: litres

(*) Versions with ABS(❒) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% distilled water.

1.4 T-JET

455 ÷ 7

6

2.752.9

1.7 (▲)

0.9

0.46 / 0.56 (*)

3

1.3 Multijet

45 (●)5 ÷ 7

7.1

3.03.2

1.7 (▲)

0.9

0.4 / 0.5 (*)

3

1.6Multijet

45 (●)5 ÷ 7

6.3

4.34.6

2.0 (❍)1.7 (Õ)

0.9

0.4 / 0.5 (*)

3

1.4

455 ÷ 7

5.8

2.42.6

1.5 (▲)

0.9

0.4 / 0.5 (*)

3

Recommended fuels and original lubricants

Unleaded petrol with no less than 95 RON (EN 228 Specification)(●) Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN 590 standard)

Mixture of 50% water and PARAFLUUP (❒)

SELENIA K P.E.(petrol versions)SELENIA WR P.E.(diesel versions)

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX (▲)TUTELA CAR MATRYX (❍)(Euro 4 versions)TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE (Õ)(Euro 5 versions)

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 fluid


217

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

According to Scheduled Servicing Plan

According to Scheduled Servicing Plan

SAE 5W-40, ACEA C3 grade totally synthetic lubricantFIAT 9.55535-S2 qualification.

SAE 5W-30 grade totally synthetic lubricant FIAT 9.55535-S1 qualification.

SELENIA K P.E.Contractual TechnicalReference No. F603.C07

SELENIA WR P.E.Contractual TechnicalReference No. F510.D07

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant features Genuine fluids and Replacementfor correct car operation lubricants interval

Lubricants for petrol engines

Lubricants for diesel engines

For diesel engines, in emergency cases where genuine products are not available, lubricants with min. performance ACEA C2 areaccepted. If this is the case, the best engine performance is guaranteed. We however recommend replacing the lubricant withthose recommended by Fiat Dealership.The use of products with characteristics inferior to ACEA C3, for petrol engines, and ACEA C2, for diesel engines, could cause dam-age to the engine, not covered by the warranty.


218

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant features Genuine fluids and Applications for correct car operation lubricants

IMPORTANT Do not use fluids with different specifications for topping-up or mixing. When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% distilled water.

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential (1.3 MultiJet Dualogicand 1.6 MultiJet Euro 4 versions)Mechanical gearbox and differential (1.6 Multijet Euro 5 version)

Mechanical gearbox and differential (petrol and 1.3 MultiJet versions)

Hydraulic power steering

Wheel side constant velocity joints

Differential side constant velocity joints

Hydraulic brakes and hydraulic clutch controls

Cooling circuitUsage percentage: 50% water 50% PARAFLUUP

Mix 25 cc per 10 litres of diesel

To be used diluted or undiluted in windscreen/rearwindow washer/wiper systems

TUTELA CAR MATRYXContractual Technical Reference No. F108.F02TUTELA TRANSMISSIONGEARFORCEContractual Technical Reference No. F002.F010

TUTELA CAR TECHNYXContractual Technical Reference No. F010.B05

TUTELA GI/AContractual Technical Reference No. F002.B92

TUTELA ALL STARContractual Technical Reference No. F702.G07

TUTELA STAR 700Contractual Technical Reference No. F701.C07TUTELA TOP 4Contractual Technical Reference No. F001.A93

PARAFLUUP

Contractual Technical Reference No. F101.M01

TUTELA DIESEL ARTContractual Technical Reference No. F601.L06TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35Contractual Technical Reference No. F201.D02

Synthetic based lubricant, grade SAE 75W-85.Exceeds API GL-4 specifications.FIAT 9.55550-MZ1 classification.

Synthetic based oil, grade SAE 75WFIAT 9.55550-MZ6 classification

Synthetic based lubricant, grade SAE 75W-85.Exceeds API GL-4 PLUS specifications.FIAT 9.55550-MX3 classification.

Automatic transmission lubricant. Consistency NLGI 1-2. FIAT 9.55550-AG1 classification.

Molybdenum disulphide grease for high temperatures. Consistency NLGI 1-2.FIAT 9.55580 classification.

Grease for constant velocity joints with low friction coefficient. Consistency NLGI 0-1.FIAT 9.55580 classification.Synthetic fluids, F.M.V.S.S. no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J-1704, CUNA NC 956-01.FIAT 9.55597 classification.

Red protective with antifreeze action, based on inhibitedmonoethyl glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.FIAT 9.55523 specification.

Additive for diesel fuel, protecting Diesel engines.

Mixture of alcohol and surfactants. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-11 specifications.FIAT 9.55522 specifications

Brake fluid

Radiator protector

Fuel additive

Windscreen/rear windowwasher fluid

Lubricants and greases for movementtransmission


219

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:

❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of thecar;

❒ extra-urban cycle: drive simulatingthe driving of the car out of town withfrequent acceleration in all gears; thespeed varies from 0 to 120 km/h;

❒ combined consumption: the weight-ing is around 37% urban cycle and 63%extra-urban cycle.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures, given in thetable below, are determined on the basisof the type-approval tests laid down byspecific European Directives.

WARNING The type of route, traffic sit-uations, weather conditions, driving style,general conditions of the car, trim level/equipment/accessories, load, climate con-trol system, roof rack, other situations thataffect air drag may lead to different fuelconsumption levels than those measured.

FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE (litres/100 km)

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined

1.4 8.2 (❍)/8.3 (❒) 5.1 (❍)/5.2 (❒) 6.3 (❍)/6.3 (❒)

1.4 T-JET 9.2 5.2 6.7

1.3 Multijet 6.5 4.0 4.9

1.6 Multijet 6.4 (❍)/6.5 (❒) 4.2 (❍)/4.3 (❒) 5.0 (❍)/5.1 (❒)


(❒) Euro 5 versions


220

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

EIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO2 emission levels given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

Versions CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDINGTO CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE (g/km)

1.4 148

1.4 T-JET 157

1.3 MultiJet 129

1.6 MultiJet 131 (❍)/134 (❒)


(❒) Euro 5 versions


page intentionally left blank


ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFEFiat has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its productionprocesses and manufacturing products that are increasingly compatible with nature. To grant customers the best possible servicein terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end oftheir life, Fiat is offering all customers the opportunity of handing over their vehicle* at the end of its life without incurring any ad-ditional costs.The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses asa result of its market value. In particular, in almost all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, vehicles registered after 1stJuly 2002 will be collected free of charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge irrespective of the year of registrationas long as the vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact a Fiat Dealership or authorised collection and scrappingcentres. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehi-cles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a Fiat and Fiat Commercial Vehicle Dealer-ship or by calling the toll-free number 00800 3428 0000 or on the Fiat website.

Pagine_ITA.indd 1 18-05-2005 11:53:40


®

Always ask your mechanic for ®

Pagine_ITA.indd 1 18-05-2005 11:53:40

In the heart of your engine.


The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia.

Oil change? The experts recommend Selenia

This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advancedinternational specifications. Its superior technical characteristics

allow Selenia to guarantee the highest performanceand protection of your engine.

The Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products:

SELENIA K PURE ENERGY

Pagine_ITA.indd 4 18-05-2005 11:54:19

Synthetic lubricant designed for latest generation, low emission, petrol engines. Its specific formulation warrants the utmost protection also for high performance turbocharged engines with high thermal stress. Its low ash content helps to maintain the total cleanliness of modern catalysts.

SELENIA WR PURE ENERGY Fully synthetic lubricant that can meet the requirements of the latest diesel engines. Low ash content to protect the particulate filter from the residual products of combustion. High Fuel Economy System that allows considerable fuel saving. It reduces the danger of dirtying the turbine to ensure the protection of increasingly high performance diesel engines

SELENIA MULTIPOWERParticularly ideal for the protection of new generation petrol engines, very effective even in the most severe weather conditions. It guarantees a reduction in fuel consumption (Energy conserving) and it is also ideal for alternative engines.

SELENIA SPORTFully synthetic lubricant capable of meeting the needs of high performance engines.Studied to protect the engine also in high thermal stress conditions, it prevents deposits on the turbine to achieve the utmost performance in total safety.

The range also includes Selenia StAR Pure Energy, Selenia Racing, Selenia K, Selenia WR, Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K AR.For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.selenia.com.


Pagine_ITA.indd 4 18-05-2005 11:54:19

NNOOTTEESS



227

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Boot light .............................................. 74

Brake fluid level ................................... 188

Brakes

– fluid level ........................................ 188

– specifications ................................. 207

Bulb (replacement)

– bulb types ....................................... 158

– general information ...................... 157

Carrying children safely ................... 109

Changing a bulb ................................... 157

Changing a wheel ................................ 147

Chassis marking .................................. 203

Checking fluid levels ........................... 184

Child safety device ............................. 83

Child seats ............................................ 114

Cigar lighter .......................................... 80

Clutch ................................................... 207

CO2 emissions .................................... 220

Code card ............................................ 6

Consumption

– engine oil ........................................ 186

– fuel ................................................... 219

Control buttons .................................. 75

Courtesy light ...................................... 74

Cruise Control .................................... 70

Dashboard .......................................... 5

Dashboard and controls ................... 4

Data plates

– bodywork paint ............................ 203

– identification data ......................... 202

Digital display ....................................... 18

Dimensions .......................................... 213

Dipped beam headlights

– bulb replacement .......................... 161

– controls .......................................... 66

Direction indicators

– controls .......................................... 67

ABS ...................................................... 92

Air cleaner ........................................... 190

Alarm .................................................... 11

Arm rest ............................................... 79

Ashtray ................................................. 81

ASR ........................................................ 95

Automatic climate control ............... 59

Battery

– inspecting the charge ................... 190

– jump starting .................................. 146

– replacement ................................... 191

Bodywork

– maintenance .................................. 196

– version codes ................................ 204

Bonnet .................................................. 89

Boot ....................................................... 86

– extension ........................................ 87

– opening and closing

the tailgate ................................. 86-87

IINNDDEEXX


228

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GIN

DEX

Fiat CODE system ............................ 6

Fix&Go Automatic ............................. 153

Flashing the headlights ....................... 66

Fluids and lubricants ........................... 217

Fog lights


– control button .............................. 75

Follow me home (device) ................. 67

Front airbags ........................................ 116

Front roof lights


– controls .......................................... 72

Fuel cap ................................................. 102

Fuel cut off switch .............................. 77

Fuel flap ................................................. 102

Fuel

– fuel cut-off switch.......................... 77

– level gauge ...................................... 17

Fuel level gauge ................................... 17

Fuses (if a fuse blows) ........................ 168

Gearbox

– using the manual gearbox ........... 126

Glove box light..................................... 78

Glove compartment ........................... 78

Handbrake .......................................... 125

Hazard warning lights ........................ 75

Head restraints

– front ................................................ 45

– rear .................................................. 46

Headlights ............................................. 91

Heated rear window ................. 53-57-76

Heating and ventilation ...................... 49

Heating/ventilation system ............... 49

Identification data .............................. 202

Ignition device ..................................... 13

In an emergency .................................. 145

Installation of electrical/electronic devices ............................ 100

Instrument panel ................................. 14

Interior fittings .................................... 78

Interiors ................................................ 199

– front bulb replacement ............... 161

– rear bulb replacement ................. 162

– side bulb replacement ................. 162

Door puddle light ............................... 74

Doors .................................................... 82

Engine compartment ........................ 184

Engine coolant temperature

indicator ............................................. 17

Engine cooling system fluid level ..... 187

Engine

– features ........................................... 205

– identification code ........................ 202

– marking ........................................... 203

Engine oil

– consumption .................................. 186

– level check ..................................... 186

EOBD system ...................................... 96

ESP system ........................................... 93

External lights ...................................... 66


229

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Paint ..................................................... 195

Parking .................................................. 125

Parking sensors ................................... 97

Passenger compartment air vents ... 50

Performance ........................................ 214

Pollen filter ........................................... 190

Power steering fluid level ................. 189

Power windows .................................. 83

Preparation for Isofix child seat ...... 120

Pretensioners ...................................... 106

Protecting the environment ............. 102

Radio .................................................... 99

Radio transmitters and mobile

phones ................................................ 100

Rain sensor .......................................... 69

Raising the car ..................................... 175

Rear ceiling lights


– controls .......................................... 72

Rear fog lights


– control button .............................. 75

Rear view mirrors ............................... 47

Reconfigurable multifunction display ................................................. 32

Refuelling the car ................................ 101

Rev counter ......................................... 16

Reversing light ..................................... 162

Roof lights ............................................. 72

Roof rack/ski rack................................ 90

Rubber hoses ....................................... 194

Safety ................................................... 103

Seat adjustment ................................... 44

Seat belts

– general warnings ........................... 107

– load limiters ................................... 106

– maintenance .................................. 109

– usage ............................................... 104

Seats

– adjusting .......................................... 44

– cleaning ........................................... 199

– tilting (rear seats) ......................... 87

Isofix (child seat) ................................. 114

Jack ........................................................ 148

Key with remote control ................ 8

Key without remote control ........... 9

Keys ....................................................... 8

Levels ................................................... 184

Load limiters ........................................ 106

Luggage compartment extension .... 87

Main beam headlights


– controls .......................................... 66

– flashing ............................................ 66

Manual climate control system ........ 53

Mechanical Brake Assist .................... 92

Multifunction display .......................... 23

Number plate lights .......................... 164

On board instruments ..................... 16


230

SAFE

TY

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

STAR

TING

UPAN

D DR

IVIN

GIN

DEX

Starting up and driving ....................... 121

Steering ................................................. 208

Steering lock ........................................ 13

Steering wheel (adjustment) ............ 46

Storage compartments ...................... 78

Storing the car .................................... 132

Sun visors ............................................. 81

Suspension ........................................... 208

Symbols ................................................. 6

Tailgate ................................................ 86

Technical specifications ..................... 201

Third brake light ................................. 164

Tool kit ................................................. 149

Top speed ............................................ 214

Towing the car .................................... 175

Towing trailers .................................... 128

– installing the tow hook ............... 129

Transmission ........................................ 207

Trip Computer ................................... 42

Tyre inflation pressure ...................... 212

Tyres

– maintenance .................................. 193

– reading the tyre code .................. 209

– replacement ................................... 147

– standard .......................................... 211

– tyre inflation .................................. 212

Using the manual gearbox .............. 126

Ventilation .......................................... 49

Warning lights and messages ......... 133

Weights ................................................ 215

Wheel

– replacement ................................... 147

– replacement ................................... 155

– spare ................................................ 211

– wheel geometry ............................ 209

Wheel geometry ................................. 209

Wheel rims

– reading the rim ............................. 210

Window cleaning ................................ 68

Windows (cleaning) ........................... 198

Servicing and care

– Heavy-duty use of the car .......... 183

– Regular checks .............................. 183

– Scheduled servicing ...................... 178

– Scheduled servicing plan ...... 179-181

Side bags ............................................... 118

Side lights

– controls .......................................... 66

– front bulb replacement ............... 160

– rear bulb replacement ................. 162

Snow chains ......................................... 131

Spark plugs

– type ................................................. 205

Speedometer (speed indicator) ....... 16

Starting the engine

– bump starting ................................ 147

– emergency starting ....................... 146

– ignition switch ............................... 13

– jump starting .................................. 146

– procedure for diesel versions .... 123

– procedure for petrol versions ... 122

– stopping the engine ...................... 124

– warming up the engine once started .................................. 124


231

SAFE

TYW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

SERV

ICING

AN

D CAR

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

D AN

D CON

TROL

SST

ARTIN

G UP

AND

DRIV

ING

Windscreen washer

– controls .......................................... 68

– fluid level ........................................ 187

Windscreen washer fluid level.......... 187

Windscreen wiper blades .................. 194

Windscreen wipers

– blades .............................................. 194

– controls .......................................... 68

– nozzles ............................................ 195


Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. – Parts & Services – Technical Services – Service EngineeringLargo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 – 10040 Volvera – Torino (Italia)

Print no. 603.99.395 – 07/2013 – 1 edition


The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. O W N E R H A N D B O O K

F I A T L I N E AENGLISH


Documents

LINEA UM GB 13-10-2011 9:36 Pagina 1 FIA T …aftersales.fiat.com/eLumData/EN/00/110_LINEA/00_110...the car. fig. 2 F0R0003m fig. 3 F0R0004m fig. 4 F0R0005m To relocate it, proceed